Sanyo DVR DSR 3709 User Guide

z Refer to the included CD-ROM for the French and Spanish “INSTRUCTION MANUAL”.  
z Utilisez le CD-ROM fourni pour consulter le “MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS” en français et en espagnol.  
z Consulte en el CD-ROM el “MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES” en francés y en español.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INTRODUCTION  
Main features  
Accessories  
Check that you have all the parts shown below.  
The digital video recorder records video from  
monitoring cameras to its internal hard disk, it  
can display the video being displayed on a  
monitor split into four, nine or sixteen  
screens, and it can also display recorded  
video in the same way.  
Power cord  
The DSR-3709 can only display split screen video in  
four or nine screens.  
Core clamp  
1 large, 1 small  
z Large core clamp  
For LAN cable  
z Small core clamp  
For RS-485 cable  
Separately-sold hard disks (80, 160, 250, or  
300 GB) can be installed to further increase  
this large memory capacity.  
Complete range of recording and playback  
functions  
Power cord tie  
z Simultaneous recording and playback of video.  
z Timer recording allows recordings to be made at  
different times each day.  
z Zoom allows a certain section of live and playback  
video to be magnified.  
z Alarm recording allows the actions of intruders to be  
recorded.  
z The video from specific cameras can be masked  
using a gray pattern to prevent it being monitored.  
z Motion sensing can be used with each camera, and  
alarms can be setup to give priority to the recording  
of moving images.  
z By connecting multiple digital video recorders, it is  
possible to perform analog series recording in which,  
once the capacity of one hard disk is reached,  
recording continues automatically on the next digital  
video recorder.  
z Instruction Manual (DVR)  
z Manual for Remote  
Operation by  
Network  
Connection  
z Quick Guide  
z CD-ROM Manual  
Symbols used in this manual  
Information describing operation methods  
or how to get the most out of functions.  
Search function - lets you instantly display the  
desired recording. (JP.30)  
z Searching in order of alarm occurrence using alarm  
search  
z Searching by thumbnail using alarm search  
z Searching by date/time  
Information describing the correct use of  
the digital video recorder.  
z Searching within the archive area  
z Searching for intruder motion using motion detection  
search  
(JP. xx) indicates the page to be referred to.  
Copyright  
z This manual and software are copyrighted by Sanyo  
Two-level security lock function - lets you  
restrict users for data and equipment  
management. (JP.89)  
Electric Co., Ltd.  
z Brand and product names used in this manual are the  
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective  
companies.  
Expandable, can be connected to a PC  
z Recorded video can be copied to CompactFlash  
cards and CD-R/RW.  
z A built-in LAN terminal provides support for network  
control, thus facilitating live monitoring, camera  
control, playback, searches, and menu setting.  
Except for personal use, copyright law prohibits the use of  
recorded copyrighted images without the permission of the  
copyright holder.  
z
Monitoring can be carried out on two different monitor  
screens - namely, the main monitor and monitor 2. In  
addition, the main monitor can be viewed in split-  
screen mode while the monitor 2 is used for full  
screen viewing or automatic camera selection.  
z Dome cameras can be controlled by button  
operations on the digital video recorder.  
z Images stored on a CompactFlash card can be  
printed directly from a printer.  
2
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTENTS  
INTRODUCTION  
1 BEFORE USE .................................................5  
3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS ...... 11  
Notes on handling the internal HDD ...............5  
Notes on installation locations ........................5  
The hard disk and cooling fan are consumable  
components. ...................................................6  
Important recordings .......................................6  
Protection of the hard disk ..............................6  
Backup battery ................................................6  
Basic connections ........................................ 11  
Connecting RS-485 terminals ...................... 11  
Connecting SANYO protocol devices  
(Dome Cameras) .......................................... 13  
Connecting an amplifier ............................... 13  
Connecting ALARM IN terminals ................. 13  
Connecting SENSOR ALARM OUT  
terminals ....................................................... 14  
Connecting CONTROL terminals ................. 14  
Connecting the power cord .......................... 14  
2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS .........7  
Front panel ......................................................7  
Rear panel ....................................................10  
OPERATION  
1 PREPARING FOR USE ................................15  
5 SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO ..... 30  
Operation display area ..................................15  
Changing the position of the operation  
display area ...................................................16  
Changing the language .................................16  
Setting the time .............................................17  
The internal hard disk ...................................18  
Alarm search ................................................ 31  
Alarm thumbnail search ............................... 32  
Time/date search ......................................... 32  
Archive area search ..................................... 34  
Motion detection search ............................... 34  
6
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO ..... 38  
2 VIEWING VIDEO FROM A CAMERA ..........19  
Copying video to the hard disk’s  
Viewing on a full screen ................................19  
Viewing on quad screens ..............................19  
Viewing on multi screens  
(9 screens/ 16 screens) ................................20  
Viewing on plus screen .................................20  
Viewing with automatic screen selection ......21  
Viewing on the monitor 2 ..............................21  
archive area ................................................. 39  
Copying video to a CompactFlash card or  
Microdrive ..................................................... 41  
Printing images from CompactFlash cards  
(quick print) .................................................. 43  
Copying video to CD-R/RW ......................... 45  
3 RECORDING ................................................23  
Normal recording ..........................................23  
Timer recording .............................................23  
Alarm recording .............................................24  
Pre-alarm recording ......................................25  
4 PLAYBACK ..................................................26  
Playing video on a full screen .......................26  
Fast-forward and fast-rewind playback .........26  
Changing the playback speed .......................27  
Enlarging the playback video ........................27  
Viewing still images .......................................28  
Performing frame advance  
(forward or reverse) ......................................29  
Playing video on multiple screens .................29  
English  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTENTS  
SETTINGS  
1 MENU CONFIGURATION AND  
4 GENERAL SET ............................................ 86  
OPERATIONS ..............................................47  
General settings ........................................... 86  
Setting data display ...................................... 86  
Setting display for video loss ........................ 87  
Setting the buzzer ........................................ 88  
Setting the security lock ............................... 89  
Setting and initializing the hard disk ............. 92  
Expanding the hard disk capacity ................ 93  
Network settings ........................................... 93  
Setting RS-485 ............................................. 96  
Setting camera control ................................. 97  
Basic menu operations .................................47  
Restoring menu setting items to  
their default values ........................................48  
Sub-menu configuration ................................49  
2 INITIAL SET .................................................51  
Initial settings ................................................51  
Setting the time .............................................51  
Setting the daylight saving ............................51  
External clock setting ....................................53  
Detecting connected cameras ......................54  
Setting camera titles .....................................55  
Setting holidays .............................................56  
Setting time periods ......................................57  
5 SCREEN SET ............................................ 100  
Setting quad, multi 9 and 16 display .......... 100  
Setting the period and monitors for  
automatic screen selection ......................... 102  
Setting masks ............................................. 104  
Setting the color level ................................. 105  
3 RECORD SET ..............................................60  
Settings for recording ....................................60  
Normal recording easy setup ........................60  
Displaying the recording areas .....................64  
Changing recording areas .............................65  
Setting overwrite permission .........................66  
Setting recording conditions ..........................67  
Setting series recording ................................69  
Setting auto deleting .....................................71  
Setting normal recording ...............................71  
Setting program recording ............................73  
Timer settings ...............................................74  
Setting alarm recording .................................77  
Setting the motion sensors ...........................81  
Setting alarm operation and display ..............84  
Canceling alarms ..........................................85  
6 POWER LOSS/USED TIME ...................... 107  
7 INITIALIZATION LOG ............................... 108  
8 COPY MENU SETTINGS .......................... 109  
Saving menu settings on a  
CompactFlash card .................................... 109  
Loading settings from a  
CompactFlash card .................................... 110  
OTHER  
1 INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS ................111  
3 MENU SETTING SEQUENCE ................... 121  
INDEX .............................................................. 123  
RS-485 specifications .................................111  
SANYO protocol command table ................112  
2 SPECIFICATIONS ......................................113  
Specifications ..............................................113  
Dimensions .................................................114  
UL disclaimer statement .............................114  
Table of recording rate and times ...............115  
Table of recording rate settings ..................117  
Table of pre-alarm recording times .............118  
Terminal board specifications .....................119  
4
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 BEFORE USE  
Notes on replacing the HDD  
Notes on handling the internal HDD  
Be sure to follow the correct procedure when replacing the  
HDD.  
This digital video recorder uses an internal hard disk drive  
(HDD).  
z HDDs that have been removed from their packing may  
not operate correctly if they are subjected to sudden  
impact or vibration. It is recommended that you place  
the HDD on a soft, level surface with the printed circuit  
board facing upward after it has been unpacked.  
z Take care to avoid subjecting the HDD to sudden  
impact or vibration when removing and tightening  
screws as part of the HDD replacement procedure.  
Tighten all screws securely to ensure that they do not  
loosen.  
Be sure to observe the following points carefully when  
operating, setting-up, or servicing the digital video  
recorder.  
Do not subject the digital video recorder to  
sudden impact or vibration.  
If the digital video recorder is subjected to sudden impact  
or vibration, it may damage the HDD or cause corruption of  
the data stored within it.  
z Do not move the digital video recorder while the power  
is turned on. Always ensure that the power is turned off  
before removing the digital video recorder from or  
placing it in a rack.  
z The HDD is sensitive to static electricity; accordingly,  
you should take the appropriate precautions to prevent  
the buildup of static charges.  
z When transporting the digital video recorder, pack it  
securely using the specified materials. In addition,  
choose a method of transportation that minimizes  
vibration.  
z When placing the digital video recorder on the floor or  
another similar surface, attach the specified pads to its  
base and place it down gently.  
Handling a detached HDD unit  
If transporting or storing the HDD unit in a detached condition,  
be sure to first of all pack it using the specified materials.  
In addition, choose a method of transportation that  
minimizes vibration.  
Notes on installation locations  
Do not move the digital video recorder for 30  
seconds after turning off the power.  
After the power is turned off, the disk inside the HDD will  
continue to spin for a brief period due to inertia, and the  
heads will be in an unstable condition.  
During this period, the digital video recorder is even more  
susceptible to damage from sudden impact and vibration  
than when it is turned on. Make sure that the digital video  
recorder is not subjected to even gentle vibration for at  
least 30 seconds after turning off the power.  
The hard disk is sensitive to dust, sudden impact, and  
vibration; furthermore, it should not be used near magnetic  
objects. The following precautions should be observed in  
order to prevent the loss of recorded data:  
z Do not subject the digital video recorder to sudden  
impact.  
z Do not use the digital video recorder on a vibrating or  
unstable surface.  
z Do not disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet  
during recording or playback.  
Do not operate the digital video recorder when  
condensation has formed on it.  
z
Do not use the digital video recorder in areas with extreme  
temperature changes (i.e., 10ºC or more per hour).  
z Condensation may occur if the digital video recorder is  
moved to an area with a significantly different  
temperature or high humidity. If the digital video  
recorder is used while condensation is present inside it,  
operating problems may occur.  
z Do not install the digital video recorder inside motor  
vehicles, trains, or other areas under constant vibration.  
z The digital video recorder has ventilation holes on its  
left, rear, and bottom panels. Ensure that these holes  
are not blocked after installation.  
If the digital video recorder is operated in this type of  
condition, there is a possibility that it will be permanently  
damaged.  
If the temperature around the digital video recorder  
changes suddenly, wait for it to stabilize before operating  
the digital video recorder.  
z Do not use the digital video recorder in a bookshelf,  
box, or any other area with poor ventilation.  
z This digital video recorder is designed for use in a  
horizontal orientation, and vertical setup may result in  
malfunction.  
z When installing the digital video recorder in a rack,  
ensure that a gap of at least 5 cm is provided at the top  
and bottom.  
English  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
BEFORE USE  
The hard disk and cooling fan are  
consumable components.  
If used in an ambient temperature of 25ºC, the hard disk  
should generally be replaced after 2 years; and the cooling  
fan after 3 years. These figures are intended as a general  
guideline only and should not be taken as a guarantee of  
component performance.  
The POWER indicator will flash if a problem occurs with  
the hard disk or fan. (JP.7)  
Important recordings  
z Always perform test recording in advance to confirm  
whether the digital video recorder’s playback is normal.  
z Note that Sanyo will accept no responsibility for losses  
occurring as a result of recording or playback problems  
caused by malfunction of this digital video recorder or  
any connected devices.  
z As a precaution against malfunction or accidents, it is  
advisable to periodically back up important recordings  
or to perform mirroring.  
Protection of the hard disk  
The hard disk is checked automatically when the power is  
turned on. If an abnormality is detected, the POWER  
indicator will begin to flash or an error message will be  
displayed. If you need initialize the hard disk or to save  
images stored on it, contact the dealer from whom you  
purchased this digital video recorder.  
Backup battery  
The digital video recorder comes with a built-in lithium  
battery. If power is supplied continuously for at least 48  
hours after setting the date and time, the clock will  
continue to operate normally for up to 30 days without a  
supply of power.  
When disposing of this digital video recorder, contact the  
dealer from whom it was purchased for information on how  
to dispose of the lithium battery.  
6
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS  
DSR-3716  
9
8
7
12 13 14  
16 17  
24  
1
2
3
4
5
15  
SHUTLE  
JOG  
MENU  
EXIT/OSD  
PLAY/STOP  
25  
26  
MENU  
ENTER  
AF  
POWER  
FULL  
ALARM FULL  
LOCK  
ALARM  
ZOOM  
SEARCH  
STILL  
FUNC.  
MULTI  
CARD  
4
5
1
9
2
3
6
7
8
AUDIO  
OUT  
QUAD  
27  
28  
29  
IRIS  
SEQUENCE  
REC/STOP  
COPY SHUTTLE HOLD  
AUTO PAN  
PLUS  
PRESET  
MON 2  
VIDEO  
12  
13  
10  
11  
14  
15  
16  
FOCUS  
TIMER  
ALARM  
USB  
ENU
ESET  
SEQUENCE  
TOUR  
EJECT  
PAN  
ZOOM/I/FO  
18  
19  
21 22  
6
10 11  
23 20  
6. [CAMERA SELECT] buttons and indicators  
Front panel  
When one or more cameras have been connected to the  
VIDEO IN terminals on the digital video recorder’s rear  
panel and the appropriate [CAMERA SELECT] button is  
pressed, the corresponding indicator lights up and the  
video feed from that camera is displayed on-screen.  
z During quad, multi 9 or 16 screen display:  
The indicators corresponding to the cameras being  
displayed on the monitor are lit up.  
1. POWER indicator  
The POWER indicator will light up when the power is  
turned on.  
If the internal HDD or fan begins to malfunction, this  
indicator will be flashed.  
2. FULL indicator (JP.68)  
The FULL indicator will begin to flash when the amount of  
available memory in the hard disk’s normal recording area  
drops to the percentage specified using menu settings.  
In addition, recording will stop automatically when no more  
memory is available, and the FULL indicator will switch to  
a permanently lit condition.  
z If video is lost:  
The indicator starts to flash.  
z If an alarm occurs:  
The indicator for the corresponding camera starts to flash.  
7. [FUNC.] button and indicator (JP.99)  
Switch to normal mode or camera control mode.  
Press button for camera control mode and indicator will  
light. Press button again to return to normal mode.  
Indicator turns off.  
This indicator can then be turned off by performing “AREA  
FULL RESET” using menu settings.  
3. ALARM FULL indicator (JP.68)  
The ALARM FULL indicator will begin to flash when the  
amount of available memory in the hard disk’s alarm  
recording area drops to the percentage specified using  
menu settings.  
In addition, recording will stop automatically when no more  
memory is available, and the ALARM FULL indicator will  
switch to a permanently lit condition.  
8. [QUAD] button and indicator (JP.19)  
The [QUAD] button is used to display video in quad  
screens, and the indicator will light up when this type of  
display is being presented.  
The QUAD indicator will turn off when a different screen  
display mode is adopted.  
This indicator can then be turned off by performing “AREA  
FULL RESET” using menu settings.  
9. [MULTI] button and indicator (JP.20)  
The [MULTI] button is used to display video in multi 9 or 16  
screens, and the indicator will light up when this type of  
display is being presented.  
The MULTI indicator will turn off when a different screen  
display mode is adopted.  
4. LOCK indicator (JP.91)  
The LOCK indicator lights up when operation has been  
locked using <SECURITY LOCK SET>.  
An alarm will be sounded if a button is pressed in this  
condition. In addition, a password entry screen will be  
displayed on the monitor at this time.  
The DSR-3709 can only display video in nine screens.  
10. [MON2] button and indicator (JP.21)  
If the [MON2] button is pressed while a monitor is  
connected to the MON2 output terminal on the rear panel,  
it will be possible to change the monitor 2 output video.  
The [CAMERA SELECT] and [SEQUENCE] buttons can  
be used, and the indicator will be lit up during the setting  
procedure.  
If the correct administrator password is entered, the lock  
condition will be cancelled and the LOCK indicator will turn  
off.  
5. ALARM indicator  
The ALARM indicator flashes during alarm recording, and  
it is lit up during pre-alarm recording.  
English  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS  
DSR-3709  
8
7
9
12 13 14  
16  
24  
15  
17  
2
3
4
5
1
SHUTTLE  
JOG  
MENU  
EXIT/OSD  
PLAY/STOP  
25  
26  
MENU  
ENTER  
AF  
POWER  
FULL  
ALARM FULL  
LOCK  
ALARM  
ZOOM  
SEARCH  
STILL  
FUNC.  
MULTI  
CARD  
4
5
1
2
3
6
7
8
9
AUDIO  
OUT  
QUAD  
27  
28  
29  
IRIS  
SEQUENCE  
REC/STOP  
COPY SHUTTLE HOLD  
AUTO PAN  
PLUS  
PRESET  
MON 2  
VIDEO  
FOCUS  
TIMER  
ALARM  
USB  
MENU
ESET
SEQUENCE  
TOUR  
EJECT
PAN  
ZOOM/I/FO  
18  
19  
21 22  
6
10 11  
23 20  
11. [PLUS] button and indicator (JP.20)  
17. [STILL] button and indicator (JP.28)  
The [PLUS] button is used to enlarge video from a single  
camera to quad screen size during multi 9 or multi 16  
screen display.  
For DSR-3709, this operation is available only when in  
multi 9 screen display.  
When the [STILL] button is pressed during playback, the  
current frame is displayed as a still image and the indicator  
lights up. Playback can be resumed by pressing this button  
once again.  
18. [SEQUENCE] button and indicator (JP.21)  
The [SEQUENCE] button can be pressed during  
monitoring to automatically switch between screen display.  
When pressed, the indicator begins flashing and the  
display is changed automatically. The lighting condition of  
CAMERA SELECT indicators also changes in response to  
the screen display.  
12. [MENU] button and indicator  
The [MENU] button is used to display the menu screens  
(i.e., setting screens), and the indicator lights up while any  
of these screens is being displayed.  
13. [EXIT/OSD] button and indicator  
z EXIT  
The [EXIT/OSD] button is used to exit the main menu or a  
sub-menu. When a menu is displayed, the indicator turns  
off; when the menu is closed and the normal display is  
restored, the indicator lights up.  
19. [COPY] button and indicator (JP.39)  
The [COPY] button is used to copy recorded video to the  
hard disk’s archive area, to a CompactFlash card, CD-R/  
RW or to a Microdrive.  
z OSD (JP.16)  
The indicator lights up during the copy process.  
Each time the [EXIT/OSD] button is pressed while the  
digital video recorder is recording, playing, or stopped, the  
operating display location moves in the order of top of  
screen, bottom of screen, to hidden; furthermore, the  
indicator lights up when this information is being displayed.  
20. [SHUTTLE HOLD] button and indicator (JP.26)  
The [SHUTTLE HOLD] button is used to lock shuttle dial  
operation for a constant speed of playback or slow playback.  
The indicator lights up while the shuttle dial is locked.  
When a password has been set, furthermore, this button  
can be pressed for at least three seconds to activate the  
security lock.  
14. [PLAY/STOP] button and indicator (JP.26)  
When the [PLAY/STOP] button is pressed, a recording  
from the normal recording area or alarm recording area is  
played and the indicator lights up. When pressed during  
playback, this button stops the digital video recorder.  
21. [REC/STOP] button and indicator (JP.23)  
The [REC/STOP] button is pressed to start normal  
recording, and the indicator lights up during this process.  
Furthermore, pressing this button for at least three  
seconds stops recording and turns off the indicator.  
15. [ZOOM] button and indicator (JP.19, 27)  
When the [ZOOM] button is pressed during monitoring or  
playback on a full screen, a portion of the playback video is  
magnified and the indicator lights up.  
16. [SEARCH] button and indicator (JP.31)  
When the [SEARCH] button is pressed while the digital  
video recorder is recording or stopped, the search menu is  
displayed and the indicator lights up. The search menu  
can be closed by pressing this button once again.  
8
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS  
DSR-3716  
9
8
7
12 13 14  
16 17  
24  
1
2
3
4
5
15  
SHUTLE  
JOG  
MENU  
EXIT/OSD  
PLAY/STOP  
25  
26  
MENU  
ENTER  
AF  
POWER  
FULL  
ALARM FULL  
LOCK  
ALARM  
ZOOM  
SEARCH  
STILL  
FUNC.  
MULTI  
CARD  
4
5
1
9
2
3
6
7
8
AUDIO  
OUT  
QUAD  
27  
28  
29  
IRIS  
SEQUENCE  
REC/STOP  
COPY SHUTTLE HOLD  
AUTO PAN  
PLUS  
PRESET  
MON 2  
VIDEO  
12  
13  
10  
11  
14  
15  
16  
FOCUS  
TIMER  
ALARM  
USB  
ENU
ESET  
SEQUENCE  
TOUR  
EJECT  
PAN  
ZOOM/I/FO  
18  
19  
21 22  
6
10 11  
23 20  
22. [TIMER] button and indicator (JP.23)  
28. Video output terminal  
If the [TIMER] button is pressed while the recording is  
stopped, timer recording standby mode is adopted and  
recording will then start automatically at the set time. The  
indicator will be lit up while in timer recording standby  
mode or timer recording.  
This terminal outputs the same video as that of the MAIN  
MONITOR output terminal on the rear panel.  
29. USB terminal (JP.45)  
This terminal connects to a recordable CD-R/RW drive.  
If the button is pressed during timer recording, this process  
is stopped and the indicator turns off. Furthermore, if the  
[TIMER] button is pressed when in timer recording standby  
mode, indicator is turned off and timer recording is  
cancelled.  
z The USB terminal is for the use of the recommended  
Sanyo CD-R/RW drive (sold separately). Non-  
recommended peripherals cannot be connected.  
z For recommended recordable drives, check the Sanyo  
homepage or ask at your local Sanyo dealer.  
Sanyo website URL:  
23. [ALARM] buttons (JP.31)  
When an [ALARM] button is pressed during playback or  
still, the digital video recorder skips to the next earlier or  
next later alarm.  
http://www.sanyosecurity.com  
24. Jog dial (inside) and shuttle dial (outside)  
z During playback:  
Use the jog dial to change the playback speed.  
Use the shuttle dial to perform fast-forward or fast-  
reverse playback.  
z During menu display:  
Use the jog dial to move the cursor and to change  
setting values. Use the shuttle dial to confirm settings.  
25. CompactFlash card slot (JP.41)  
This slot is used to house a CompactFlash card or Microdrive.  
26. [MENU RESET] button (JP.48)  
The [MENU RESET] button is used to default menu  
settings.  
When setting motion sensors, furthermore, all sensors on  
the same line as the cursor can be turned on  
simultaneously by pressing this button.  
27. Audio output terminal  
Audio output is the same as that of the rear panel AUDIO  
OUT terminal.  
English  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS  
DSR-3716  
(The number of terminals for the DSR-3709 may differ. For more details, see below.)  
14  
17  
AC IN  
ALARM IN  
C
C
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
1
2
IN  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
18  
OUT  
AUDIO  
MONITOR OUT  
MAIN  
REMOTE  
MON2  
LAN  
RS-485  
TERMINATE  
OFF ON  
IN  
OUT  
USB  
MIC IN  
A RS-485  
B
SENSOR  
ALARM OUT  
C
R1 R2  
C
ALL  
RESET  
DO NOT CONNECT TO PHONE LINE  
CONTROL  
12  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11  
13  
16  
15  
16. CONTROL terminals  
Rear panel  
1. VIDEO IN terminals  
Pin  
Signal  
C
Ground  
The DSR-3709 has nine VIDEO IN terminals.  
REMOTE R1  
REMOTE R2  
Remote input 1  
Remote input 2  
2. VIDEO OUT terminals  
The DSR-3709 has nine VIDEO OUT terminals.  
Input of a clock setting signal from an  
external device  
3. [ALL RESET] button  
CLOCK SET IN  
When the [ALL RESET] button is pressed, the digital video  
recorder is reset and the time is returned to its default  
setting.  
Output of a clock setting signal to an  
external device  
CLOCK SET OUT  
ALARM OUT  
Total alarm output  
Alarm reset input  
4. AUDIO IN terminal  
ALARM RESET  
WARNING OUT  
5. AUDIO OUT terminal  
6. MIC IN terminal  
Output of an HDD or FAN malfunction error  
Capacity warning output for normal  
recording area space  
FULL  
7. MAIN MONITOR output terminal  
8. MON2 output terminal  
Capacity warning output for alarm recording  
area space  
ALARM FULL  
SERIES IN  
9. USB terminal  
This terminal connects to a recordable CD-R/RW drive.  
Signal input from an analog series  
connection  
10. LAN terminal (10 Base-T or 100 Base-TX)  
11. RS-485 termination switch  
12. RS-485 terminal (A)  
SERIES OUT  
EXT TIMER IN  
NON REC OUT  
C
Signal output to an analog series connection  
Signal input from an external timer  
Non-recording output  
13. RS-485 terminal (B)  
Ground  
14. ALARM IN terminals  
17. Power socket (AC IN)  
Insert the supplied power cable securely into this socket.  
These terminals are used to activate alarm recording in  
response to operation of an alarm switch on a connected  
device.  
18. Power cord holder  
Secure the power cord to the holder  
using the cord tie (accessory) as  
shown in the illustration.  
The DSR-3709 has nine ALARM IN terminals.  
Pin  
Signal  
C
Ground  
Alarm input No. 1 through No. 16  
ALARM IN 1 to 16  
15. SENSOR ALARM OUT terminals  
The terminals are used when motion sensors have been  
set (JP.81) to output an alarm signal to a connected  
device upon detection of motion.  
The DSR-3709 has nine SENSOR ALARM OUT terminals.  
Pin  
Signal  
C
Ground  
SENSOR ALARM OUT Output of an alarm signal for Camera  
1 to 16 No. 1 through No. 16  
10  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS  
This section describes how to connect the digital video recorder to video cameras and other devices. Be sure to read the  
instruction manuals for each connected device.  
z Improper connections can result in malfunction or the  
emission of smoke.  
z A separate power supply is required for operation of  
each camera.  
Basic connections  
The following diagram shows the connections for cameras, monitors, a microphone, and a PC.  
DSR-3716  
The DSR-3709 can be connected to nine cameras.  
System controller (sold separately)  
VSP-8000/9000  
Camera  
(sold separately)  
The RS-485 connector is  
connected to A or B according  
to the type of cable.  
*2 Wrap the cable once around the  
small core clamp to attach it.  
(1-16)  
AC IN  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
ALARM IN  
C
C
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
IN  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
Microphone  
(sold separately)  
OUT  
AUDIO  
IN OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
MAIN MON2  
REMOTE  
LAN  
RS-485  
TERMINATE  
OFF ON  
USB  
MIC IN  
A RS-485  
B
SENSOR  
ALARM OUT  
C
R1 R2  
C
ALL  
RESET  
DO NOT CONNECT TO PHONE LINE  
CONTROL  
120 V-240 V AC  
(50/60 Hz)  
Video input  
terminal  
Video input  
terminal  
*1 Wrap the cable once around the  
large core clamp to attach it.  
PC  
01  
03  
02  
04  
* If the monitor 2 (MON2) is not synchronized  
with the connected cameras, vertical  
picture instability may occur upon the  
switching of camera video.  
Monitor  
Monitor 2  
(sold separately) (sold separately)  
Connecting RS-485 terminals  
z Do not connect to phone line.  
The RS-485 terminals are used to connect a system  
controller (sold separately) to the digital video recorder.  
After connecting the system controller, you will need to  
carry out the settings that are given in the <RS-485 SET>  
menu. (JP.96)  
Pin number  
Connector A signal  
Connector B signal  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Not used  
Not used  
A
Not used  
Not used  
B
B
A
Pin locations  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
A: Non-inverting driver output/receiver input  
B: lnverting driver output/receiver input  
1
6
English  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS  
Connection  
RS-485 termination switch settings  
The digital video recorder supports both straight type and  
crossed type connection cables.  
When using a straight type connection cable, connect the  
RS-485 connector’s pin A to the pin A socket, or pin B to  
the pin B socket.  
When connecting multiple devices, you must make  
termination settings on both end devices.  
z Set the RS-485 termination switch of both end devices  
to ON.  
z Be sure to set the RS-485 termination switches of all  
devices in between (devices other than the first and last  
devices) to OFF.  
When using a crossed type connection cable, connect the  
RS-485 connector’s pin A to the pin B socket, or pin B to  
the pin A socket.  
A
RS485  
B
DO NOT CONNECT TPHONE LINE  
z If you don’t make the correct termination settings, the  
incorrect data will be transmitted to each device.  
To other  
connector A  
To other  
connector A  
Example  
System controller  
Straight type cable  
Crossed type cable  
Cable types  
Straight type:  
ON  
Termination  
switch  
Not used  
Not used  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
OFF  
Not used  
Not used  
Crossed type:  
Not used  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Digital video recorder  
Not used  
RS-485  
OFF ON  
termination  
switch  
Not used  
Not used  
Time-lapse VCR  
ON  
Termination  
switch  
OFF  
12  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS  
Connecting SANYO protocol devices  
(Dome Cameras)  
Connecting an amplifier  
An amplifier is connected when using a microphone or  
external speakers with the digital video recorder.  
Turn off all devices and use a coaxial cable to connect the  
devices.  
z Use the same procedure to connect using PELCO and  
BBV.  
Audio input  
Amp  
(sold separately)  
Audio  
output  
AUDIO  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
Camera  
z Audio input from the AUDIO IN terminal and the MIC IN  
terminal cannot be performed simultaneously. If both  
terminals have devices connected, the MIC IN terminal  
is used.  
1 Connect cameras to the VIDEO IN  
terminals.  
2 Set the protocols and address in the  
<CAMERA CONTROL SET> screen.  
(JP.97)  
Connecting ALARM IN terminals  
3 Operate the dome cameras with the  
When using external alarms (i.e., intruder sensors and the  
like), external switches are to be connected to the ALARM  
IN terminals.  
front panel buttons. (JP.99)  
16  
Connecting ALARM IN  
terminals to external  
switches  
1
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
The DSR-3709 has nine ALARM IN terminals.  
English  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS  
Connecting SENSOR ALARM OUT  
terminals  
Connecting the power cord  
1 When you have finished making all the  
other connections, make sure the  
voltage is 120 V-240 V AC and insert the  
power plug into the wall outlet.  
The SENSOR ALARM OUT terminals are used to relay  
alarm signals whenever one of the digital video recorder’s  
motion sensors is triggered. Normally in an open condition,  
a terminal adopts low condition when a sensor for the  
corresponding camera number has been triggered.  
There is no power switch. The display indicators flash, and after  
a few moments, the monitor screen displays the camera image.  
1K  
Rating for each terminal  
z Maximum current: 25 mA  
z Maximum voltage: 25 V  
120 V-240 V AC  
(50/60 Hz)  
Connecting CONTROL terminals  
The connections for a remote control circuit are shown  
below. This digital video recorder can be remotely controlled  
when a remote-control circuit similar to that shown here is  
connected to the remote-input control terminals.  
z When turning the power on for the first time  
“PLEASE SET THE CLOCK” is displayed on the monitor  
screen. Follow the procedures on P.17 to set the clock.  
z If the clock is already set  
The operation display area is displayed.  
Operation  
01-01-04 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000  
display area  
C
R1  
R2  
02  
R1  
R2  
(Whenoperated(Whencombined  
independently) with R2 Shift key)  
z If the POWER indicator starts flashing;  
: Camera 1*: INDEX +  
: Camera 2*: INDEX -  
: Camera 3*: AUTO FOCUS  
: Camera 4*: SEQUENCE  
: Camera 5*: MON2  
SW 17 : REC/STOP  
SW 18 : PLAY/STOP  
SW 19 : STILL  
SW 1  
SW 2  
SW 3  
SW 4  
SW 5  
SW 6  
SW 7  
SW 8  
SW 9  
SW 10  
SW 11  
SW 12  
SW 13  
SW 14  
SW 15  
SW 16  
If a problem occurs during use, the POWER indicator  
will begin to flash and an explanation will be displayed.  
In these cases, contact a Sanyo service center.  
SW 20 : SEARCH  
POWER  
Meaning  
SW 21  
SHIFT (Doubles with R1)  
:
indicator status  
: Camera 6*: PLUS  
SW 22 : PLAY  
SW 23 : REC  
SW 24 : MENU  
SW 25 : EXIT/OSD  
SW 26 : +  
There is a problem with the hard disk. The  
Four flashes per hard disk must be replaced or initialized.  
: Camera 7*: QUAD  
: Camera 8*: MULTI  
second  
Contact a Sanyo service center to recover  
recorded images.  
: Camera 9*: MENU RESET  
: Camera 10:  
One flash per  
second  
: Camera 11: PAN left  
: Camera 12: PAN right  
: Camera 13: TILT down  
: Camera 14: TILT up  
: Camera 15: ZOOM wide  
: Camera 16: ZOOM tele  
SW 27 : -  
There is a problem with the fan.  
SW 28  
:
:
SW 29  
SW 30  
SW 31  
SW 32  
z The power cord’s ground terminal is not provided for  
enhanced safety; rather, it can be used to reduce the  
level of interference when the digital video recorder is  
connected to analog devices.  
: ZOOM  
: COPY  
: TIMER  
If a large amount of noise is generated when the digital  
video recorder is connected to analog devices, connect  
this terminal to the building’s earth.  
z Use a resistance of 1/10 ohms or more and with a D  
ranking (Precision within ±0.5%).  
z The remote control cable should be no more than 5 m  
long.  
* The DSR-3709 can operate up to nine cameras (*).  
14  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 PREPARING FOR USE  
(5) Picture quality display (JP.71)  
Operation display area  
Displays the quality of the video that can be recorded  
on the hard disk. Set to “EN” (Enhanced) by default.  
Whenever the power is turned on, the operation display  
area will be shown at the top of the monitor screen. This  
area indicates the date, time, picture quality, and other  
information needed for operation.  
BA  
NO  
EN  
FI  
Basic  
Normal  
Enhanced  
Fine  
01-01-04 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000  
SF  
Super Fine  
(6) Audio recording display  
“A” is displayed when audio is being recorded or  
played back.  
(7) Alarm display and alarm count display (JP.77)  
When you set an alarm using the “ALARM REC  
MODE SET” menu item, the alarm display area  
presents the following information.  
z When alarm recording is set;  
“ALARM” is displayed.  
02  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4) (5)(6) (7)  
01-01-04 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000  
02  
“ALARM” is flashed during alarm recording.  
z When pre-alarm recording is set;  
“PRE” is displayed.  
(8)  
(1) Date display (JP.17)  
When an alarm occurs, “PRE” disappears,  
“ALARM” is displayed, and the number of alarms is  
shown. The total number is indicated in the alarm  
display.  
“01-01-04” (month-day-year) is displayed when you  
turn the power on for the first time. Be sure to specify  
the correct date using menu settings.  
(2) Time display (JP.17)  
z When performing playback from the archive  
area;  
“00:00:00” is displayed when you turn the power on for  
the first time. The digital video recorder uses the date  
and time to manage recording and playback points.  
Accordingly, if the time has not been set correctly, you  
will not be able to effectively search for video data.  
Make sure to specify the time using menu settings.  
Recording will not be possible until a setting has been  
made.  
“ARCHIV” is displayed.  
z When an external alarm signal is activated;  
“EA” is flashed to the left of the camera number.  
z When a motion sensor alarm signal is  
activated;  
“SA” is flashed to the left of the camera number.  
z When an external alarm signal and motion  
sensor signal are activated;  
(3) Operating symbol display  
Displays the current operation (such as recording or  
playback).  
“ES” flashes to the left of the camera number.  
(8) Camera title display  
REC: Recording  
EXT: External timer recording  
: Playback  
: Fast-forward playback  
: Fast-rewind playback  
: Slow playback  
The camera number or camera title is displayed. In  
addition, when an alarm occurs, the camera number  
and alarm “EA”, “SA” or “ES” are displayed along with  
the camera title.  
: Reverse playback  
: Still  
: Reverse slow playback  
z During video loss;  
The display alternates between showing the  
camera title and “VIDEO LOSS”. “VIDEO LOSS”  
flashes when the operating display is hidden.  
(JP.16)  
z During simultaneous recording and playback, the  
display indicates playback ( ).  
(4) Remaining memory in recording area (JP.67)  
Displays the remaining area memory as a percentage  
when overwriting in the normal recording area or the  
alarm recording area is forbidden. If overwriting has  
been permitted, “REPEAT” is displayed.  
z During no video signal;  
“NO VIDEO” is displayed in place of the camera  
title.  
z Although operations such as playback, copying, and  
data transfer are possible while recording, this unit  
gives priority to recording, and other operations may be  
delayed as a result.  
English  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
PREPARING FOR USE  
[MENU] button  
[EXIT/OSD] button  
Shuttle dial  
[REC/STOP] button  
Jog dial  
Changing the position of the  
operation display area  
1 Press the [MENU] button.  
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is  
displayed.  
1 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
MENU  
<MAIN MENU>  
As the [EXIT/OSD] button is pressed, the operation display  
area moves to a different location or is hidden.  
1.INITIAL SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
2.RECORD SET  
3.GENERAL SET  
Top (default)  
4.SCREEN SET  
01-01-04 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000  
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME  
6.INITIALIZATION LOG  
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS  
Bottom  
01  
02  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
Hidden  
01-01-04 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000  
Operation  
display area  
2 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The <INITIAL SET> screen is displayed.  
03  
04  
Changing the language  
<INITIAL SET>  
1.LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET  
2.CAMERA DETECT  
3.TITLE SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
Use the following procedure to set the language displayed  
on the monitor.  
4.HOLIDAY SET  
5.TIME PERIOD SET  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Item  
Setting  
Description  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
ENGLISH  
Sets the language to English.  
3 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The cursor moves to “ENGLISH”.  
LANGUAGE  
FRANCAIS Sets the language to French.  
ESPAÑOL Sets the language to Spanish.  
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/IDIOMA>  
ENGLISH  
<CLOCK SET>  
01-01-2004 THU 00:00:00  
<DAYLIGHT SAVING>  
MODE  
:
USE  
MONTH  
04  
WEEK  
TIME  
ON  
OFF  
1ST-SUN  
LST-SUN  
02:00  
02:00  
10  
<EXT.CLOCK SET>  
ADJUST. TIME 01:00  
16  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
PREPARING FOR USE  
4 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise, and  
then turn the jog dial to select the  
desired language.  
3 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The <LANGUAGE/LANGUE/IDIOMA> screen is  
displayed.  
The set item flashes.  
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/IDIOMA>  
ENGLISH  
<REGL.LANGUE>  
FRANCAIS  
<CLOCK SET>  
01-01-2004 THU 00:00:00  
<DAYLIGHT SAVING>  
<REGL.ORLOGE>  
01-01-2004 JEU 00:00:00  
<HEURE D,ETE>  
MODE  
:
USE  
MONTH  
04  
WEEK  
TIME  
MODE  
:
MARCHE  
MOIS  
04  
ON  
OFF  
1ST-SUN  
LST-SUN  
02:00  
02:00  
SEMAINE  
1ER-DIM  
DER-DIM  
HEURE  
02:00  
02:00  
10  
ON  
OFF  
<EXT.CLOCK SET>  
ADJUST. TIME 01:00  
10  
<REGL.HORLOGE EXTERNE>  
REGL.DE L,HEURE  
01:00  
4 Turn the jog dial to select the date and  
time for <CLOCK SET> and turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
5 When you have made a selection, turn  
the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The cursor moves to the date and time.  
The language has now been set.  
“01” flashes (indicating the month).  
To return to the normal screen, press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/IDIOMA>  
ENGLISH  
K
EXIT/OSD  
<CLOCK SET>  
01-01-2004 THU 00:00:00  
<DAYLIGHT SAVING>  
MODE  
:
USE  
MONTH  
04  
WEEK  
TIME  
ON  
OFF  
1ST-SUN  
LST-SUN  
02:00  
02:00  
Setting the time  
10  
<EXT.CLOCK SET>  
ADJUST. TIME 01:00  
(Default: 01-01-2004 THU 00:00:00)  
Be sure to set the correct date and time as these settings  
are used during recording and searching.  
5 Set “10” with the jog dial or numeric  
keys and turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
Example: Setting 8:30 on October 26, 2004  
“01” flashes (indicating the day).  
1 Press the [MENU] button.  
10-01-2004 MON 00:00:00  
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is  
displayed.  
MENU  
6 Use the same procedure to set the day  
(26), year (2004), hour (08), and minute  
(30).  
<MAIN MENU>  
1.INITIAL SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
2.RECORD SET  
3.GENERAL SET  
4.SCREEN SET  
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME  
6.INITIALIZATION LOG  
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS  
When you have set the minute, the cursor moves to  
“MODE” under <DAYLIGHT SAVING>, and the clock  
starts counting from 00 seconds.  
z The week day is set automatically.  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
z The clock is stopped during date and time settings.  
2 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
7 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The <INITIAL SET> screen is displayed.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
<INITIAL SET>  
1.LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET  
2.CAMERA DETECT  
3.TITLE SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
EXIT/OSD  
4.HOLIDAY SET  
5.TIME PERIOD SET  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
English  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
PREPARING FOR USE  
The internal hard disk  
[C] Archive area  
Recording  
mode  
Recording method  
<RECORDING AREA SET>  
This area is used to store important  
video data copied from the normal  
recording area and/or alarm recording  
area. By making changes to the normal  
recording area and the alarm recording  
area, this area can be extended to up  
to 10 GB in size (i.e., 12% when using  
a 80 GB hard disk).  
TOTAL CAPACITY  
:
:
82GB  
80 %  
[A]  
NORMAL RECORDING AREA  
AREA FULL RESET  
ALARM RECORDING AREA  
AREA FULL RESET  
ARCHIVE AREA  
->  
[B]  
[C]  
:
:
19 %  
1 %  
Copy  
Manual  
->  
->  
AREA FULL RESET  
CAUTION : WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,  
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !  
Hard disk recording areas  
z If the memory allocations for the various hard disk  
recording areas are changed during a recording  
process, all stored recordings will be deleted and the  
hard disk will be initialized; accordingly, special care  
should be taken. For more details, refer to P.65.  
z In the case of certain hard disks, error may be present  
in the total hard disk capacity as displayed on menu  
screens.  
When the digital video recorder is turned on, recording  
areas are automatically setup within the internal hard disk  
(with the default settings being normal recording area:  
80%, alarm recording area: 19%, and archive area: 1%).  
When the [REC/STOP] button is pressed, this digital video  
recorder starts recording video data in the normal  
recording area. When an alarm occurs, the corresponding  
video data is recorded in the alarm recording area.  
Alarm  
recording  
area  
B
Archive area  
C
1%  
19%  
80%  
Normal recording  
area  
A
Hard Disk Recording Areas  
[A] Normal recording area  
Recording  
mode  
Recording method  
When monitoring, recording is per-  
formed in response to pressing of the  
[REC/STOP] button.  
Normal  
recording  
Manual  
Timer  
recording  
Recording is carried out in accordance  
with timer settings.  
Automatic  
[B] Alarm recording area  
Recording  
mode  
Recording method  
Recording is carried out when alarm  
recording is set to “ENABLED”. Specifi-  
cally, alarm images are recorded in the  
alarm recording area in response  
either to operation of a switch that has  
been connected to an alarm input ter-  
minal or to detection of an intruder or  
the like using motion sensors.  
Alarm  
recording  
Automatic  
Automatic  
When pre-alarm recording is set to  
“ON”, it will be possible to record video  
from before the occurrence of an alarm  
based on the corresponding settings.  
Pre-alarm  
recording  
18  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 VIEWING VIDEO FROM A CAMERA  
[MULTI] button  
[SEQUENCE] button  
[PLUS] button  
[CAMERA SELECT] buttons  
[MON2] button  
[QUAD] button  
Viewing on a full screen  
Viewing on quad screens  
Example: Selecting Camera 2  
Images from multiple connected cameras can be  
displayed simultaneously.  
1 Press the No. 2 [CAMERA SELECT]  
button.  
1 Press the [QUAD] button.  
The QUAD indicator lights up and video from four separate  
cameras is displayed simultaneously.  
Video from Camera No. 1 through Camera No. 4 is  
displayed.  
The No. 2 CAMERA SELECT indicator lights up and video  
from Camera 2 is displayed on a full screen.  
QUAD  
01  
03  
02  
04  
02  
Viewing enlarged live images  
Images can be enlarged while monitoring on a full screen.  
Operations are the same as “Enlarging the playback  
video”. See P.27 for more details.  
2 To view video from other cameras,  
press the [QUAD] button again.  
Each time this button is pressed, the four images on the  
quad screen change, in order of cameras No. 1-4, 5-8, 9-  
12 and 13-16.  
On the DSR-3709, the images change in order of cameras  
No. 1-4, 5-8, 9-3, etc.  
QUAD  
05  
07  
06  
08  
3 To return to full screen display, press  
the [CAMERA SELECT] button.  
English  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
VIEWING VIDEO FROM A CAMERA  
Viewing on multi screens (9 screens/  
16 screens)  
Viewing on plus screen  
Enlarge one camera video to quad screen size to view in  
multi 6/13 screen display.  
For DSR-3709, this operation is available only when in  
multi 9 screen display.  
1 Press the [MULTI] button.  
The MULTI indicator lights up and video from nine  
separate cameras is displayed simultaneously. Press the  
[MULTI] button again to display video from 16 cameras.  
The DSR-3709 can only display video from nine cameras.  
1 Press the [PLUS] button.  
PLUS indicator lights and one camera image is enlarged.  
MULTI  
PLUS  
01  
04  
02  
05  
03  
06  
01  
04  
02  
05  
03  
06  
03  
06  
MULTI  
01
07  
08  
14  
09  
07  
08  
09  
07  
08  
09  
13  
15  
16  
2 Press the corresponding [CAMERA  
SELECT] button to change enlarged  
camera image.  
z For both quad and multi 9/16 screen display, display  
positions can be changed. (JP.100)  
The video from the selected camera is enlarged.  
2 To return to full screen display, press  
the [CAMERA SELECT] button.  
03  
02  
06  
07  
08  
09  
3 Press [MULTI] button to switch from  
multi 6 screen display to multi 13 screen  
display.  
Operation can be performed solely with DSR-3716.  
MULTI  
03  
07  
11  
15  
04  
08  
12  
16  
03  
06  
01  
01
09  
13  
10  
14  
07  
08  
09  
4 Press [PLUS] button to return to the  
previous display.  
z The time required for updating differs for each image.  
20  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
VIEWING VIDEO FROM A CAMERA  
2 Press the [SEQUENCE] button.  
Viewing with automatic screen  
selection  
The content of the split screen will automatically toggle  
between video from cameras No. 1 through No. 4 and  
video from cameras No. 5 through No. 8, No. 9 through  
No. 12 and No. 13 through No. 16  
Setting automatic full screen selection  
Use the following procedure when viewing a full screen to  
have the displayed video change automatically based on  
camera numbers.  
On the DSR-3709, the video changes automatically in  
order of cameras No. 1-4, 5-8, 9-3, etc.  
1 Press the [SEQUENCE] button.  
The SEQUENCE indicator starts to flash and the displayed  
01  
03  
02  
04  
video changes automatically based on camera numbers.  
07  
08  
11  
12  
15  
16  
Returning to normal quad-screen display  
Press the [SEQUENCE] button once again.  
01-01-04 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000  
01  
04-01-01 00:00:00 REC REPEATENA ALARM 0000  
02  
3
01-01-01 00:00:00 REC REPEATENA ALARM 0000  
15  
02-01-01 00:00:00 REC REPEATENA ALARM 0000  
16  
Automatic selection ends and normal quad-screen display  
returns.  
z It is possible to specify the cameras for which automatic  
selection is to be carried out. (JP.102)  
z Automatic selection cannot be used with playback  
video.  
Canceling automatic selection  
Viewing on the monitor 2  
2 Either press the [SEQUENCE] button  
once again or press the appropriate  
[CAMERA SELECT], [QUAD], or [MULTI]  
button.  
When a monitor 2 is connected to the monitor 2 output  
terminal on the digital video recorder’s rear panel, this  
monitor can be used to view video from a single camera or  
to automatically scroll through video from all cameras,  
even if the main monitor is currently displaying video in  
split-screen format. In addition, it is also possible to display  
video on the monitor 2 automatically from any camera for  
which an alarm has occurred. By default, automatic full  
screen selection is carried out.  
Automatic selection ends and the display returns to the  
normal screen.  
Setting automatic quad-screen selection  
1 Press the [QUAD] button.  
Change the monitor 2 setting  
The QUAD indicator lights up and the monitor display is  
divided in four.  
1 Press the [MON2] button.  
QUAD  
The MON2 indicator lights up.  
MON2  
01  
03  
02  
04  
[MON2] button  
English  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
VIEWING VIDEO FROM A CAMERA  
z Monitor 2 operation is not possible when a menu screen  
is being displayed.  
z As the [EXIT/OSD] button is pressed, the operating  
display moves to a different location or is hidden in the  
same manner as the main monitor. (JP.16)  
z If the monitor 2 is not synchronized with the connected  
cameras, vertical picture instability may occur upon the  
switching of camera video.  
Displaying alarm video in full screen format  
Selecting Camera No. 4 for full screen  
1 Set “MON.2 DISPLAY” from <ALARM  
OPERATION SET> to “ON”. (JP.84)  
2 Press the No. 4 [CAMERA SELECT]  
button.  
When an alarm occurs, the corresponding video is  
displayed in full screen format on the monitor 2.  
The video from Camera No. 4 is displayed in full screen  
format on the monitor 2.  
01-01-04  
00:00:00  
T  
02  
Main Monitor  
Monitor 2  
01-01-04  
00:00:00  
Ending the monitor 2 setting procedure  
1 Press the [MON2] button.  
03  
01  
06  
The MON2 indicator turns off.  
04  
07  
08  
09  
MON2  
Setting automatic full screen selection  
1 Press the [SEQUENCE] button.  
The video displayed on the monitor 2 changes  
automatically based on camera numbers.  
Press the [SEQUENCE] button once again to cancel  
automatic selection.  
z Playback video cannot be viewed on the monitor 2.  
M
R
Monitor 2  
Main Monitor  
01-01-04  
00:00:00  
03  
01  
06  
04  
07  
08  
09  
01-01-04  
00:00:00  
05  
06  
03  
04  
22  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 RECORDING  
POWER indicator  
FULL indicator  
[REC/STOP] button  
[TIMER] button  
Normal recording  
Timer recording  
Use the following procedure to record the monitored video  
in the normal recording area.  
Recording will not be possible until a time has been set for  
the digital video recorder. Make sure to set the time.  
(JP.17)  
Use the following procedure to record the monitored video  
for a preset length of time in the normal recording area.  
Recording will not be possible until a time has been set for  
the digital video recorder. Make sure to set the time. (  
JP.17)  
1 Press the [TIMER] button.  
1 Press the [REC/STOP] button.  
The TIMER indicator lights up and the digital video  
recorder enters timer recording standby mode.  
The REC/STOP indicator lights up, “REC” appears on-  
screen (i.e., the recording symbol), and recording starts.  
TIMER  
Recording symbol  
01-01-04 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000  
REC/STOP  
01-01-04 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000  
02  
(1) See P.74 for more details on timer recording settings.  
(2) At the time specified for the start of timer recording, the  
REC/STOP indicator lights up, “REC” appears on-  
screen (i.e., the recording symbol), and recording starts.  
(3) At the time specified for the end of timer recording, the  
REC/STOP indicator turns off, and recording ends.  
The [TIMER] button remains lit up.  
02  
z When recording for the first time, the default settings  
are used. For details regarding modification of the  
picture quality or recording rate, see P.71.  
z When the space remaining in the normal recording area  
drops below a preset value, the FULL indicator on the  
digital video recorder’s front panel starts to flash. If  
recording is continued beyond this point, the normal  
recording area will become full, recording will stop, and  
the FULL indicator will stop flashing and remain lit. In  
such a case, use the <RECORDING AREA SET>  
screen to perform “AREA FULL RESET” for the normal  
recording area, thus allowing recording to start again  
from the beginning. (JP.67)  
z When the space remaining in the normal recording area  
drops below a preset value, the FULL indicator on the  
digital video recorder’s front panel starts to flash. If  
recording is continued beyond this point, the normal  
recording area will become full, recording will stop, and  
the FULL indicator will stop flashing and remain lit. In  
such a case, use the <RECORDING AREA SET> menu  
to perform “AREA FULL RESET” for the normal  
recording area, thus allowing recording to start again  
from the beginning. (JP.67)  
z Playback is possible even while recording. See P.26 for  
more details.  
z Playback is possible even while recording. See P.26 for  
more details.  
Ending normal recording  
Stopping timer recording before completion  
2 Press and hold the [REC/STOP] button  
for approximately 3 seconds.  
“REC” disappears from the operation display and  
recording ends.  
2 Press the [TIMER] button.  
The TIMER indicator turns off and recording ends.  
TIMER  
REC/STOP  
English  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORDING  
[EXIT/OSD] button  
POWER indicator  
ALARM FULL indicator  
Alarm recording  
Counts the number  
of alarms.  
Values between  
0000 and 9999 can  
be displayed.  
01-01-04 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000  
Use the following procedure to automatically record alarm  
video to the alarm recording area when an alarm signal is  
detected.  
Recording will not be possible until a time has been set for  
the digital video recorder. Make sure to set the time.  
(JP.17)  
02  
z If an alarm occurs during normal recording or timer  
recording, the recording operation will be cancelled.  
z A maximum of 16,000 alarm recordings can be made  
on one hard disk. If hard disk expansion is carried out,  
this number can be increased to 32,000. Note,  
1 Set alarm recording.  
Follow the instructions on P.77 to set “7. ALARM REC  
MODE SET” from <RECORD SET>.  
<RECORD SET>  
however, since settings for each condition will affect the  
maximum number of recordings that can be made, be  
sure to check menu settings and display content.  
1.NORMAL REC EASY SET  
2.RECORDING AREA SET  
3.RECORDING CONDITIONS SET  
4.NORMAL REC MODE SET  
5.PROGRAM REC SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
6.TIMER SET  
3 End alarm recording.  
7.ALARM REC MODE SET  
8.ALARM OPERATION SET  
When the alarm duration has expired (default setting: 20  
seconds), both “REC” and “ALARM” finish flashing from  
the operation display and recording stops.  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
2 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
z When the space remaining in the alarm recording area  
drops below a preset value, the ALARM FULL indicator  
on the digital video recorder’s front panel starts to flash.  
If recording is continued beyond this point, the alarm  
recording area will become full, recording will stop, and  
the ALARM FULL indicator will stop flashing and remain  
lit. In such a case, use the <RECORDING AREA SET>  
menu to perform “AREA FULL RESET” for the alarm  
recording area, thus allowing recording to start again  
from the beginning. (JP.67)  
z When normal recording area is set to “*0%,” alarm  
recording can be executed as long as there is  
remaining space on the hard disk. More than 16,000  
alarm recordings can be recorded on each hard disk.  
(JP.65)  
EXIT/OSD  
When an alarm signal is detected  
z When an alarm signal is detected, “ALARM” flashes in  
the operation display and the alarm recording starts  
(indicated by “REC”).  
z Alarm video is recorded to the alarm recording area.  
z Whenever an alarm occurs, the number of alarms as  
indicated in the operation display is incremented.  
24  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORDING  
If an alarm is detected  
Pre-alarm recording  
Pre-alarm recording is automatically ended and alarm  
recording starts.  
z “PRE” from the operation display area is replaced by  
“ALARM”, and “ALARM” starts to flash.  
Use the following procedure to record video from  
immediately before occurrence of an alarm.  
1 Set pre-alarm recording.  
01-01-04 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000  
Follow the instructions on P.79 set “7. ALARM REC MODE  
SET” from <RECORD SET> to “PRE-ALARM  
RECORDING”.  
<ALARM REC MODE SET>  
ALARM RECORDING  
: ENABLED  
: ENHANCED  
: ON  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
02  
ALARM INTERLEAVE  
REC RATE: A 15FPS,  
PRE-ALARM RECORDING  
REC RATE: A 15FPS,  
: ONLY  
DURATION: 20SEC  
: ON  
DURATION: 1MIN  
=> (00371 ALARMS CAN BE RECORDED)  
z When recording for the first time, the default settings  
are used. For details regarding modification of the  
picture quality or recording rate, see P.71.  
ALARM TRIGGER  
MOTION SENSOR  
: ALARM  
->  
z When the space remaining in the alarm recording area  
drops below a preset value, the ALARM FULL indicator  
on the digital video recorder’s front panel starts to flash.  
If recording is continued beyond this point, the alarm  
recording area will become full, recording will stop, and  
the ALARM FULL indicator will stop flashing and remain  
lit. In such a case, use the <RECORDING AREA SET>  
menu to perform “AREA FULL RESET” for the alarm  
recording area, thus allowing recording to start again  
from the beginning. (JP.67)  
2 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
“PRE” appears in the operation display area. Pre-alarm  
recording starts (without the “REC” symbol being  
displayed).  
EXIT/OSD  
01-01-04 00:00:00  
EN A PRE 0000  
ALARM FULL indicator  
02  
English  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 PLAYBACK  
Use the following procedure to play video stored in the normal recording area (during normal or timer recording).  
POWER indicator  
[ZOOM] button [PLAY/STOP] button  
Normal  
Shuttle dial  
recording area  
Jog dial  
[QUAD] button [MULTI] button  
[STILL] button  
[SHUTTLE HOLD] button  
[CAMERA SELECT] buttons  
Playing video on a full screen  
1 Press the [PLAY/STOP] button.  
The PLAY/STOP indicator lights up, and “ ” appears in  
the operation display area. Video stored in the normal  
recording area is played back. Use the appropriate  
[CAMERA SELECT] button to select the camera whose  
video is to be played.  
Fast-forward and fast-rewind  
playback  
1 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise or  
counter-clockwise during video  
playback.  
PLAY/STOP  
Operation  
01-01-04 00:00:00  
EN A ALARM 0000  
display area  
When turned clockwise, the symbol “ ” appears in the  
operation display area and fast-forward playback is  
started.  
When turned counter-clockwise, the symbol “ ” appears  
in the operation display area and fast-rewind playback is  
started.  
02  
Normal playback is resumed when you release the shuttle  
dial.  
z Video playback begins at the start point of recording.  
z If the start point of recording has been cleared or reset,  
video playback will start from the earliest recording.  
z When playback ends, the digital video recorder pauses  
automatically.  
The operation display area indicates that playback is  
paused (using “ ”), and the STILL indicator lights.  
z After being paused or stopped, playback resumes from  
the stop point.  
z If the [SHUTTLE HOLD] button is pressed while the  
shuttle dial is being turned and either “ ” or “ ” is  
displayed, the speed of fast-rewind or fast-forward  
playback will be maintained even after the dial is  
released.  
Ending playback  
2 Press the [PLAY/STOP] button.  
Playback ends.  
PLAY/STOP  
Playing video near the point of recording  
The digital video recorder prioritizes recording operations,  
and as a result, video playback may pause temporarily.  
26  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
PLAYBACK  
(2) Returning to normal playback.  
Press the [SHUTTLE HOLD] button to  
Changing the playback speed  
SHUTTLE HOLD  
turn off SHUTTLE HOLD indicator.  
Turn the shuttle dial either clockwise  
or counter-clockwise to display “ ” in  
the operation display area.  
Starting fast-forward or slow playback  
(1) Performing fast-forward.  
When the jog dial is turned clockwise,  
Normal video playback is restored.  
fast-forward playback is started and the  
symbol “ ” appears in the operation  
display area.  
Enlarging the playback video  
1
Press the [ZOOM] button during  
playback or monitoring of camera video.  
(2) Performing slow playback.  
When the jog dial is turned counter-  
clockwise, slow playback is started and  
the symbol “ ” appears in the  
operation display area.  
ZOOM indicator lights and a zoom frame appears in the  
center of the screen.  
ZOOM  
(3) Returning to normal playback.  
Turn the jog dial slightly clockwise to  
display “ ”.  
2 Move the zoom frame to the area to be  
magnified.  
z Audio will not be played during fast-forward, fast-  
rewind, slow, reverse-slow, and reverse playback.  
z Turn the jog dial clockwise to move the zoom frame to  
the right.  
Starting fast-rewind or reverse-slow playback  
(1) Turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise to display  
Turn the jog dial counter-clockwise to move the zoom  
frame to the left.  
” in the operation display area.  
Reverse playback starts at the same  
speed as normal playback.  
z Turn the shuttle dial clockwise to switch to vertical  
movement.  
Press the [SHUTTLE HOLD] button  
while “ ” is being displayed. The  
SHUTTLE HOLD indicator lights up,  
and even if the shuttle dial is now  
released, reverse playback continues at  
the current speed.  
SHUTTLE HOLD  
z Now, when the jog dial is turned clockwise, the zoom  
frame moves down; when turned counter-clockwise, the  
zoom frame moves up.  
z Turn the jog dial counter-clockwise.  
” appears in the operation display  
area and the speed of reverse  
playback increases.  
z Turn the jog dial clockwise.  
” appears in the operation display  
area and the speed of reverse  
playback decreases.  
English  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
PLAYBACK  
z In this way, move the zoom frame to enclose the area of  
Viewing still images  
video to be magnified.  
1 Press the [STILL] button during  
playback.  
The STILL indicator lights up and playback video is paused.  
The symbol “ ” appears in the operation display area.  
STILL  
01-01-04 00:00:00  
REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000  
3 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The area enclosed by the zoom frame is magnified (by a  
factor of 2).  
02  
To resume playback  
2 Press the [STILL] button once again.  
Normal playback is restored.  
STILL  
02  
Returning to normal magnification  
4 Press the [ZOOM] button.  
Magnification is cancelled and the display returns to the  
normal screen. ZOOM indicator turns off.  
ZOOM  
02  
z Magnification is not possible on monitor 2 or during  
quad screen, multi-screen (9 screens/ 16 screens), or  
plus screen display.  
z Magnified video has a slightly coarser appearance  
when compared with normal video.  
28  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
PLAYBACK  
2 Press the [QUAD] button.  
Each time this button is pressed, the content of the split  
screen will toggle between video from cameras No. 1  
through No. 4 and video from cameras No. 5 through No.  
8, No. 9 through No. 12 and No. 13 through No. 16.  
Performing frame advance  
(forward or reverse)  
1 Turn the jog dial clockwise or counter-  
clockwise while playback is paused.  
On the DSR-3709, the images change in order of cameras  
No. 1-4, 5-8, 9-3, etc.  
Clockwise: The still image is moved forward by one frame  
or field.  
QUAD  
Counter-clockwise: The still image is moved back by one  
frame or field.  
05  
07  
06  
08  
01-01-04 00:00:00  
REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000  
02  
Returning to full screen display  
Press the [CAMERA SELECT] button.  
z The jog dial can be turned to increase the speed of  
Playing video on multi 9 or multi 16 screens  
1 Press the [MULTI] button.  
frame advance.  
The MULTI indicator lights up and video from nine  
separate cameras is displayed simultaneously. Press the  
[MULTI] button again to display video from 16 cameras.  
The DSR-3709 can only display video from nine cameras  
at a time.  
z When the images from normal recording area and  
alarm recording area are played back in succession, the  
quality of the picture may drop momentarily as playback  
switches from one recording area to another.  
z If normal, fast-forward, or fast-rewind playback is  
carried out either for playback during alarm recording or  
for continuous playback from the normal recording area  
and alarm recording area, the image may seem to have  
paused in certain cases.  
MULTI  
01  
04  
02  
05  
03  
06  
MULTI  
Playing video on multiple screens  
07  
08  
14  
09  
13  
15  
16  
If you are recording video from a number of different  
cameras, the following procedures can be used to play the  
recorded video in multi-screen format.  
Returning to full screen display  
Press the [CAMERA SELECT] button.  
Playing video on quad screens  
1 Press the [QUAD] button during  
playback.  
z In the case of quad, multi 9 and 16 screen display you  
can change the position in which playback video is  
displayed. (JP.100)  
The QUAD indicator lights up and the monitor display is  
divided in four.  
QUAD  
01  
03  
02  
04  
English  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO  
Images stored in the normal recording area, alarm  
recording area or archive area can be located by  
searching and can then be played back. Use one of the  
following five search methods to locate the required video.  
(1) ALARM SEARCH (JP.31)  
Lets you search and playback alarm video from the  
recording list.  
<ALARM SEARCH>  
NO  
DATE TIME  
CH  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOTAL ALARMS  
00016  
0016 01-05 09:53  
0015 01-05 09:53  
0014 01-05 09:53  
0013 01-05 09:53  
0012 01-05 09:52  
0011 01-05 09:51  
0010 01-05 09:51  
0009 01-05 03:10  
Archive area  
Alarm recording  
area  
Normal  
recording area  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
(2) ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH (JP.32)  
Lets you search and playback alarm video using a  
thumbnail list.  
[SEARCH] button  
Shuttle dial  
0016  
0013  
0010  
0015  
0012  
0009  
0014  
0011  
0008  
Jog dial  
[ALARM] buttons  
(3) TIME/DATE SEARCH (JP.32)  
Lets you search and playback recorded video based  
Searching from the <SEARCH> screen  
on date and time.  
<TIME/DATE SEARCH>  
RECORDING TOP : 01-16-04 14:46  
RECORDING END : 01-19-04 13:32  
CHANNEL : --  
(1)  
<SEARCH>  
ALARM SEARCH  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH  
TIME/DATE SEARCH  
SEARCH :  
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH  
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH  
DATE  
TIME  
14:46  
->  
01-16-04  
PREVIEW  
VIEW  
->  
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE  
MOVE:JOG SELECT:SHUTTLE  
(4) ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH (JP.34)  
Lets you playback video that has been stored in the  
archive area.  
z During the playback of video, you can use the front-  
panel buttons, the shuttle dial, and the jog dial to  
perform operations such as pause and fast-forward.  
<ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH>  
NO  
DATE START CH  
CAPACITY  
0001 01-01 01:48  
0002 01-05 09:53  
0003 01-01 02:41  
0004 01-02 03:10  
0005 01-02 04:25  
0006 01-04 02:40  
0007 01-04 01:25  
0008 01-04 01:25  
MOVE:JOG  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOTAL  
USED  
-
-
816MB  
16MB  
z Search is unavailable during playback or menu display.  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
(5) MOTION DETECTION SEARCH (JP.34)  
Lets you search and playback video of moving objects  
detected by motion sensors.  
<MOTION DETECTION SEARCH>  
SEARCH FROM  
START  
:
:
:
ALARM  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
01-01-04 00:40  
01-05-04 10:17  
END  
CHANNEL  
: --  
->  
-
-
-
-
-
-
START PREVIEW  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
LEVEL : OFF  
EXIT  
30  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO  
Alarm search  
3 Turn the jog dial to select the video for  
playback.  
A preview of the selected alarm video is displayed in the  
preview screen. In this case, the video from the instant of  
alarm occurrence is displayed.  
Use the following procedure to search and playback all  
video stored in the alarm recording area. If pre-alarm video  
is being recorded, playback will start from immediately  
before the alarm.  
1 Press the [SEARCH] button while the  
digital video recorder is recording or  
stopped.  
z To display the next or previous recording  
Turn the jog dial clockwise or counter-clockwise accordingly.  
The SEARCH indicator lights up and the <SEARCH>  
screen is displayed.  
z To leave search mode  
SEARCH  
Press the [SEARCH] button. SEARCH indicator turns off.  
<SEARCH>  
ALARM SEARCH  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH  
TIME/DATE SEARCH  
4 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH  
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH  
The selected recording is played back in full screen mode.  
01-01-04 00:00:00  
EN A ALARM 0000  
MOVE:JOG SELECT:SHUTTLE  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “ALARM  
SEARCH”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
02  
The <ALARM SEARCH> screen is displayed.  
The eight most-recent alarm recordings are displayed.  
To view pre-alarm video  
After beginning playback of an alarm recording identified by  
an alarm search, use the shuttle dial to reverse playback.  
(1) (2) (3)  
(4)  
To view alarm video before or after the current  
playback  
<ALARM SEARCH>  
NO  
DATE TIME  
CH  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOTAL ALARMS  
00016  
0016 01-05 09:53  
0015 01-05 09:53  
0014 01-05 09:53  
0013 01-05 09:53  
0012 01-05 09:52  
0011 01-05 09:51  
0010 01-05 09:51  
0009 01-05 03:10  
1 Press the appropriate [ALARM] button  
during playback.  
(5)  
ALARM  
01-01-04 00:00:00  
EN A ALARM 0000  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
(1) NO:  
Indicates the alarm number.  
(2) DATE/TIME:  
02  
Indicates the date and time at which the alarm video  
was recorded.  
z Each time the “  
” button is pressed, playback will  
(3) CH:  
skip to the preceding alarm video recording.  
Indicates the alarm video’s channel (or camera  
number).  
z Each time the “  
” button is pressed, playback will  
skip to the subsequent alarm video recording.  
(4) TOTAL ALARMS:  
Indicates the total number of alarm video recordings.  
z
z
When playback is performed after an alarm search, the frame  
at the start and end of each alarm recording will be paused.  
Press the appropriate [ALARM] button to play the  
previous or next alarm recording.  
You can use the front-panel buttons, the shuttle dial, and the  
jog dial to perform operations such as pause and fast-forward.  
(5) Preview:  
Displays the selected alarm video.  
English  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO  
Alarm thumbnail search  
5 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The selected recording is played back in full screen mode.  
Use the following procedure to display all of the alarm  
recordings stored in the alarm recording area as  
thumbnails list.  
1 Press the [SEARCH] button while the  
digital video recorder is recording or  
stopped.  
To view pre-alarm video  
After beginning playback of an alarm recording identified  
by an alarm search, use the shuttle dial to reverse  
playback.  
The SEARCH indicator lights up and the <SEARCH>  
screen is displayed.  
SEARCH  
z In the same way as for alarm searching, playback is  
only possible within each individual alarm recording.  
Press the appropriate [ALARM] button to play the  
previous or next recording.  
z You can use the front-panel buttons, the shuttle dial,  
and the jog dial to perform operations such as pause  
and fast-forward.  
2 Turn the jog dial and select “ALARM  
THUMBNAIL SEARCH”.  
<SEARCH>  
ALARM SEARCH  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH  
TIME/DATE SEARCH  
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH  
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH  
Time/date search  
Use the following procedure to play a recording from the  
normal recording area (i.e., a normal recording or timer  
recording) or alarm recording area by specifying its date  
and time.  
MOVE:JOG SELECT:SHUTTLE  
3 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The nine most-recent alarm recordings are displayed.  
An alarm number is indicated together with each alarm  
recording, and the number of the currently selected  
recording will flash.  
1 Press the [SEARCH] button while the  
digital video recorder is recording or  
stopped.  
The SEARCH indicator lights up and the <SEARCH>  
screen is displayed.  
SEARCH  
0016  
0013  
0010  
0015  
0012  
0009  
0014  
0011  
0008  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “TIME/DATE  
SEARCH”.  
<SEARCH>  
ALARM SEARCH  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH  
TIME/DATE SEARCH  
4 Turn the jog dial to select the alarm  
recording for playback.  
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH  
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH  
The alarm number for the selected recording will start to  
flash.  
MOVE:JOG SELECT:SHUTTLE  
z To display the next or previous recording  
Turn the jog dial clockwise or counter-clockwise  
accordingly.  
z To leave search mode  
Press the [SEARCH] button. SEARCH indicator turns off.  
32  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO  
3 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
4 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
After searching, the recording for the date and time  
settings is displayed in the preview screen.  
The <TIME/DATE SEARCH> screen is displayed.  
<TIME/DATE SEARCH>  
(1)  
RECORDING TOP : 10-01-04 14:46  
<TIME/DATE SEARCH>  
RECORDING TOP : 10-01-04 14:46  
RECORDING END : 10-30-04 13:32  
CHANNEL : 05  
(2)  
RECORDING END : 10-30-04 13:32  
(3)  
CHANNEL : --  
(4)  
SEARCH :  
DATE  
TIME  
20:30  
->  
SEARCH :  
10-26-04  
PREVIEW  
VIEW  
DATE  
TIME  
20:30  
->  
(5)  
10-26-04  
PREVIEW  
VIEW  
(6)  
->  
SEARCHING  
->  
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE  
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE  
(1) RECORDING TOP:  
z If no recording exists for the specified time  
The closest recording to the specified time is displayed.  
z To leave search mode  
Indicates the date/time of the earliest video recording.  
(2) RECORDING END:  
Indicates the date/time of the most-recent video  
recording.  
Press the [SEARCH] button. The display returns to the  
normal screen.  
(3) CHANNEL:  
Used to enter the channel (or camera number) for  
playback.  
5 Turn the jog dial clockwise to select  
“VIEW”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
(4) SEARCH:  
Used to enter the date/time of the recording to be  
played.  
The selected recording is played back on the full screen.  
(5) PREVIEW:  
Select this option and turn the shuttle dial clockwise to  
display the preview screen.  
(6) VIEW:  
Select this option and turn the shuttle dial clockwise to  
play the recording.  
Example: To search for a recording from camera 5  
from 8:30 pm on October 26, 2004  
z The retrieved video can be displayed on the full screen  
without displaying the preview screen by entering the  
date and time, and by then selecting “VIEW”.  
z You can use the front-panel buttons, the shuttle dial,  
and the jog dial to perform operations such as pause  
and fast-forward.  
<TIME/DATE SEARCH>  
RECORDING TOP : 10-01-04 14:46  
RECORDING END : 10-30-04 13:32  
Date and time  
for searching  
(1)  
CHANNEL : 05  
SEARCH :  
DATE  
TIME  
20:30  
->  
10-26-04  
(2)  
(4)  
20 : 30  
10-26-04  
PREVIEW  
VIEW  
z If “CHANNEL” is set to “--” and playback is started, this  
will take place on the multi screen.  
->  
(3)  
(5) (6)  
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE  
Turn the jog dial to select “CHANNEL”.  
(1) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise, turn the jog dial to  
select “05”, and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise  
once again.  
(2) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise, and then turn the jog  
dial to change to “10” (month).  
(3) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise, and then turn the jog  
dial to change to “26” (day).  
(4) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise, and then turn the jog  
dial to select “04” (year).  
(5) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise, and then turn the jog  
dial to select “20” (hour).  
(6) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise, turn the jog dial to  
change to “30” (minutes), and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise once again.  
The cursor moves to “PREVIEW”.  
English  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO  
Archive area search  
4 Turn the jog dial to select the video for  
playback.  
The selected image is displayed on the preview screen.  
Use the following procedure to playback video that has  
been stored in the archive area.  
1 Press the [SEARCH] button while the  
digital video recorder is recording or  
stopped.  
The SEARCH indicator lightsup and the <SEARCH>  
screen is displayed.  
z To display the next or previous recording  
Turn the jog dial clockwise or counter-clockwise  
accordingly.  
SEARCH  
z Up to eight recordings can be displayed in the  
<ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH> screen.  
z To leave search mode  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “ARCHIVE  
AREA SEARCH”.  
Press the [SEARCH] button. SEARCH indicator turns  
off.  
<SEARCH>  
ALARM SEARCH  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH  
TIME/DATE SEARCH  
5 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The selected recording is played back on the full screen.  
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH  
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH  
MOVE:JOG SELECT:SHUTTLE  
3 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The <ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH> screen is displayed.  
This screen lists the eight most-recent recordings in the  
order in which archiving was performed.  
Motion detection search  
By setting the motion sensor for recordings from the  
normal recording area (i.e., normal recordings and timer  
recordings) or alarm recording area, variations from these  
recordings as a result of the presence of an intruder or the  
like can be detected, and the corresponding video can be  
played back.  
(2)  
(4)  
(1)  
(3)  
<ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH>  
DATE START CH CAPACITY  
NO  
(5)  
(6)  
0001 01-01 01:48  
0002 01-05 09:53  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOTAL  
USED  
-
-
816MB  
16MB  
0003 01-01 02:41  
0004 01-02 03:10  
0005 01-02 04:25  
0006 01-04 02:40  
0007 01-04 01:25  
0008 01-04 01:25  
MOVE:JOG  
z When a camera number (or channel) is specified,  
searching will only be carried out for that camera.  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
(1) NO: Indicates the archive number.  
(2) DATE: Indicates the date of recording.  
(3) START: Indicates the start time for the recording.  
(4) CH: Indicates the channel (or camera number) for the  
recording.  
1 Press the [SEARCH] button while the  
digital video recorder is recording or  
stopped.  
(5) TOTAL: Indicates the total capacity of the archive  
SEARCH indicator lights up and the <SEARCH> screen is  
displayed.  
area.  
(6) USED: Indicates the amount of the archive area that  
has been used.  
SEARCH  
34  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “MOTION  
DETECTION SEARCH”, and then turn  
the shuttle dial clockwise.  
5 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise, and  
then turn the jog dial to select a camera  
number.  
The <MOTION DETECTION SEARCH> screen is  
displayed.  
Example: 4  
<MOTION DETECTION SEARCH>  
SEARCH FROM  
START  
:
:
:
ALARM  
01-01-04 00:40  
01-05-04 10:17  
END  
CHANNEL  
: --  
->  
6 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The cursor moves to “START PREVIEW”.  
<MOTION DETECTION SEARCH>  
START PREVIEW  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
SEARCH FROM  
START  
:
:
:
ALARM  
01-01-04 00:40  
01-05-04 10:17  
3 Turn the jog dial to select “SEARCH  
FROM”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
END  
CHANNEL  
: 4  
START PREVIEW  
->  
The ALARM indicator starts to flash.  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
<MOTION DETECTION SEARCH>  
SEARCH FROM  
START  
:
:
:
ALARM  
01-01-04 00:40  
01-05-04 10:17  
7 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
END  
The screen changes and the preview screen for Camera  
No. 4 appears.  
CHANNEL  
: --  
->  
START PREVIEW  
<MOTION DETECTION SEARCH>  
SEARCH FROM : ALARM  
/ CHANNEL : 4  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(5)  
START :  
01-05-04 10:00  
END  
:
01-05-04 10:17  
4 Turn the jog dial to select a search area,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
MOTION SENSOR ->  
(4)  
PREVIEW  
VIEW  
->  
->  
MOVE:JOG SELECT:SHUTTLE  
Example: ALARM  
The cursor moves to “CHANNEL”.  
(1) START:  
<MOTION DETECTION SEARCH>  
SEARCH FROM  
START  
:
:
:
ALARM  
Indicates the date and time of recording of the first  
image in the selected recording area(s).  
01-01-04 00:40  
01-05-04 10:17  
END  
(2) END:  
CHANNEL  
: --  
->  
Indicates the date and time of recording of the final  
image in the selected recording area(s).  
START PREVIEW  
(3) MOTION SENSOR:  
Indicates the motion sensor setting.  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
(4) PREVIEW:  
Displays the selected start image.  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
(5) VIEW:  
Setting  
Description  
Plays the selected recording on the full screen.  
Searching will only be performed for  
recordings in the alarm recording area.  
ALARM  
Searching will only be performed for  
recordings in the normal recording area.  
NORMAL  
Searching will be performed for recordings  
in the alarm recording area and normal  
recording area.  
ALARM &  
NORMAL  
English  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO  
(2) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise to set a motion sensor.  
: ON, : OFF  
Set the motion sensor to use for searching  
1 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise while  
video is being displayed on the preview  
screen.  
(1) Turn the jog dial to set the start date and time for  
motion sensing (i.e., 10 AM on the same day), and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
(3) Use the jog dial in the same way to set sensors at  
other locations.  
The recording for the selected time is displayed in the  
preview screen. The cursor moves to the “END” date  
and time.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Typical  
setting  
<MOTION DETECTION SEARCH>  
-
-
-
-
-
-
SEARCH FROM : ALARM  
/ CHANNEL : 4  
START :  
Set the start  
date and time.  
01-05-04 10:00  
LEVEL : OFF  
EXIT  
END  
:
01-05-04 10:17  
MOTION SENSOR ->  
PREVIEW  
VIEW  
->  
->  
z
All sensors on the same line as the cursor can be turned  
on simultaneously by pressing the [MENU RESET] button.  
MOVE:JOG SELECT:SHUTTLE  
(2) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
3 Turn the jog dial to move the cursor to  
“LEVEL”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
(3) Turn the jog dial to set the end date and time for  
motion sensing (i.e., 8 PM on the same day), and then  
turn the shuttle dial clockwise. The cursor moves to  
“MOTION SENSOR”.  
“OFF” flashes.  
<MOTION DETECTION SEARCH>  
SEARCH FROM : ALARM  
/ CHANNEL : 4  
START :  
01-05-04 10:00  
END  
:
01-05-04 20:00  
Set the end date  
and time.  
MOTION SENSOR ->  
4 Turn the jog dial to select “OFF” or a  
sensitivity level between “1” and “10”,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
After setting the sensitivity level, the cursor moves to “EXIT”.  
PREVIEW  
VIEW  
->  
->  
MOVE:JOG SELECT:SHUTTLE  
2 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The motion sensor setting screen is displayed.  
Use the following procedure to set motion sensors at  
locations where movement is to be detected and viewed.  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Setting  
OFF  
Description  
(1) Turn the jog dial clockwise or counter-clockwise to  
move the cursor to the position where a sensor is to  
be set.  
Motion sensing is not carried out.  
Motion sensing is carried out. Lower values corre-  
spond to higher sensitivities.  
1 to 10  
5 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The display returns to the <MOTION DETECTION  
SEARCH> screen.  
36  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO  
6 Turn the jog dial to select “PREVIEW”.  
<MOTION DETECTION SEARCH>  
SEARCH FROM : ALARM  
/ CHANNEL : 4  
START :  
01-05-04 10:00  
END  
:
01-05-04 20:00  
MOTION SENSOR ->  
PREVIEW  
VIEW  
->  
->  
MOVE:JOG SELECT:SHUTTLE  
7 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
Each time the shuttle dial is turned clockwise, a different  
motion sensor screen will be displayed on the preview  
screen.  
If “NOT FOUND” is displayed  
Carry out motion sensor setting again.  
Viewing video detected by the motion sensor  
on a full screen  
8 Turn the jog dial to select “VIEW”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
Normal playback will be started for the specified recording.  
z By specifying a camera number (or channel) and  
performing MOTION DETECTION SEARCH, playback  
can be carried out for only the specified camera  
number.  
In such a case, the title information, date information,  
and/or time information may partially disappear.  
z To playback a recording from a different camera, stop  
the current playback and then repeat the setting  
process from the beginning.  
English  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO  
Use the procedures described below to copy important video stored in the normal recording area or the alarm recording area  
to the digital video recorder’s archive area, a CompactFlash card, a Microdrive or CD-R/RW.  
Copying video to the hard disk’s archive area (JP.39)  
Copy  
Copy  
Alarm recording  
area  
Archive area  
Normal recording area  
Copying video to a CompactFlash card or Microdrive (JP.41)  
Automatic copy  
Automatic copy  
Archive area  
Alarm recording  
area  
Normal recording area  
CF card  
Microdrive  
Copying video to a CD-R/RW (JP.45)  
Automatic copy  
Automatic copy  
Archive area  
Alarm recording  
area  
USB  
Normal recording area  
CD-R/RW  
z Copied data is stored as a continuous recording.  
z When video is being downloaded from the normal  
recording area or alarm recording area to a  
z If archive area becomes full, copy important video to a  
CompactFlash card, a Microdrive or CD-R/RW. (JP.41)  
Following this, delete data from the archive area using  
“AREA FULL RESET” from the “ARCHIVE AREA” in  
“2.RECORDING AREA SET” on the <RECORD SET>  
sub-menu. (JP.67)  
CompactFlash card, a Microdrive or CD-R/RW, it is  
temporarily stored in the archive area before being  
copied from there to each media. Consequently, the  
amount of free space in the archive area is the  
maximum amount that can be copied. Note, however,  
that this video will not be retained in the archive area.  
38  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO  
4 Turn the jog dial to select “COPY TO”,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
Copying video to the hard disk’s  
archive area  
“ARCHIVE AREA” starts to flash.  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
[STILL] button  
Shuttle dial  
Setting  
Description  
Video will be copied to the archive area.  
(JP.39)  
ARCHIVE AREA  
Video will be copied to a CompactFlash  
card. (JP.41)  
COMPACT FLASH  
CF->PRINT  
Jog dial  
Copy to a CompactFlash card and print  
directly from a printer. (JP.43)  
Copy to a CD-R/RW. This is only  
displayed when a recordable CD-R/RW  
drive is connected to the digital video  
recorder. (JP.45)  
[COPY] button  
CD-R/RW  
1 Play video from the normal recording  
area or the alarm recording area.  
COPY TO : ARCHIVE AREA  
HOW MANY:  
START  
1 PICTURES  
->  
2 Press the [STILL] button when the frame  
to be copied is displayed.  
FORMAT  
:
COMPACT FLASH  
STILL  
FORMAT START  
->  
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE  
5 Turn the jog dial to select “ARCHIVE  
AREA”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
z Images from all cameras cannot be copied  
simultaneously. Use the appropriate [CAMERA  
SELECT] button to select the camera whose video is to  
be copied.  
The cursor moves to “HOW MANY”.  
Example: Copying a specified 10-second  
portion of video  
3 Press the [COPY] button.  
The COPY indicator lights up and the <COPY> screen is  
6 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise, and  
then turn the jog dial to set “HOW  
MANY” to “10”.  
displayed.  
COPY  
Any value between 1 and 60 can be set.  
COPY TO :  
HOW MANY:  
START  
ARCHIVE AREA  
1 PICTURES  
->  
COPY TO : ARCHIVE AREA  
HOW MANY:  
START  
10 PICTURES  
->  
FORMAT  
:
COMPACT FLASH  
FORMAT START  
->  
FORMAT  
:
COMPACT FLASH  
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE  
FORMAT START  
->  
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE  
English  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO  
7 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
10Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“PICTURES” flashes.  
COPY TO : ARCHIVE AREA  
HOW MANY:  
START  
10 PICTURES  
->  
(1) Copying to the archive area commences.  
The message “COPY TO ARCHIVE AREA !” is  
displayed on-screen during the copy procedure.  
FORMAT  
:
COMPACT FLASH  
FORMAT START  
->  
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE  
8 Turn the jog dial to select “SECONDS”.  
COPY TO ARCHIVE AREA ! < 55% >  
COPY TO : ARCHIVE AREA  
HOW MANY: 10 SECONDS  
START  
->  
(2) When this procedure has been completed, “COPY  
FINISHED !” is displayed.  
FORMAT  
:
COMPACT FLASH  
FORMAT START  
->  
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
COPY FINISHED !  
< 100% >  
Setting  
Description  
The specified number of images after the  
specified location will be copied.  
PICTURES  
The specified duration in seconds after the  
specified location will be copied.  
SECONDS  
MINUTES  
The specified duration in minutes after the  
specified location will be copied.  
To cancel a copy operation  
Press the [COPY] button to cancel the current copy.  
9 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The cursor moves to “START”.  
COPY TO : ARCHIVE AREA  
HOW MANY: 10 SECONDS  
START  
->  
FORMAT  
:
COMPACT FLASH  
FORMAT START  
->  
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE  
40  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO  
3 Turn the jog dial to select “COPY TO”,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
Copying video to a CompactFlash  
card or Microdrive  
“ARCHIVE AREA” flashes.  
Use the following procedure to copy video either to a  
Microdrive and to a CompactFlash card (Supported up to 2  
GB).  
COPY TO : ARCHIVE AREA  
HOW MANY:  
START  
1 PICTURES  
->  
Shuttle dial  
FORMAT  
:
COMPACT FLASH  
FORMAT START  
->  
Jog dial  
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE  
4 Turn the jog dial to select “COMPACT  
FLASH”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
[COPY] button  
1 Insert a CompactFlash card.  
The cursor moves to “HOW MANY”.  
Insertion method  
Removal method  
(1)  
COPY TO :  
HOW MANY:  
START  
COMPACT FLASH  
1 PICTURES  
->  
Rear  
surface  
FORMAT  
:
COMPACT FLASH  
(3)  
(2)  
FORMAT START  
->  
(2)  
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE  
(3)  
(1) Open the cover.  
(2) Ensuring that it is correctly  
oriented, insert the  
(1)  
5 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise, and  
then turn the jog dial to set “HOW  
MANY”.  
(1) Raise the lever.  
(2) Push in the lever.  
(3) Remove the  
CompactFlash card into the  
CompactFlash card slot.  
(3) Fold down the lever.  
CompactFlash card.  
COPY TO :  
HOW MANY:  
START  
COMPACT FLASH  
10 PICTURES  
->  
Example: Copying a specified 10-second  
portion of video  
6 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“PICTURES” flashes.  
2 Pause playback on the image to be  
copied, and then press the [COPY]  
button.  
COPY TO :  
HOW MANY:  
START  
COMPACT FLASH  
10 PICTURES  
->  
The <COPY> screen is displayed.  
COPY  
7 Turn the jog dial to select “SECONDS”.  
COPY TO :  
HOW MANY:  
START  
ARCHIVE AREA  
1 PICTURES  
->  
COPY TO :  
HOW MANY:  
START  
COMPACT FLASH  
10 SECONDS  
->  
FORMAT  
:
COMPACT FLASH  
FORMAT START  
->  
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE  
English  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Setting  
Description  
z If the CompactFlash card becomes full during the  
copying process, the message “COMPACT FLASH  
FULL!” will be displayed and copying will end. Press  
any button to return to the normal screen. The copy  
procedure should now be repeated using a new  
CompactFlash card.  
The specified number of images after the speci-  
fied location will be copied.  
PICTURES  
The specified duration in seconds after the spec-  
ified location will be copied.  
SECONDS  
MINUTES  
The specified duration in minutes after the speci-  
fied location will be copied.  
z JPEG images  
JPEG files contain field images, and for this reason,  
they will be 50% compressed in the vertical direction  
when viewed using commercially-available image  
processing software. These files should, therefore, be  
opened using the INDEX.HTM file.  
z Up to 40,000 images can be copied in a single  
operation. When specifying the number of images using  
“MINUTES”, copying will end at the point at which  
40,000 images are copied.  
z Images copied to a CompactFlash card  
z Alarm recordings can only be copied one event at a  
Since images copied to a CompactFlash card contain  
embedded coding for the detection of manipulation,  
these codes can be detected using a suitable software  
application. For more information, contact the dealer  
from whom you purchased this digital video recorder.  
z Use a FAT16 CompactFlash card. The digital video  
recorder will not recognize FAT32 CompactFlash cards.  
Format cards with the digital video recorder before use.  
time.  
8 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The cursor moves to “START”.  
COPY TO :  
HOW MANY:  
START  
COMPACT FLASH  
10 SECONDS  
->  
FORMAT  
:
COMPACT FLASH  
z When images are copied directly from the normal  
recording area or the alarm recording area to a  
CompactFlash card, these images will be temporarily  
copied to the archive area. Consequently, the amount  
of free space in the archive area is the maximum  
amount that can be copied. Note, however, that this  
data will be automatically deleted when copying has  
been completed.  
FORMAT START  
->  
9 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
z When copying images to a CompactFlash card,  
approximately 15 seconds will be required for 1 MB.  
(1) Copying to the CompactFlash card starts. The  
message “COPY TO COMPACT FLASH !” is  
displayed on-screen at this time.  
COPY TO COMPACT FLASH ! < 55% >  
(2) When this has been completed, “COPY FINISHED !”  
is displayed.  
COPY FINISHED !  
< 100% >  
To cancel a copy operation  
Press the [COPY] button to cancel the current copy.  
42  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO  
Viewing images copied to a CompactFlash  
card on a PC  
Printing images from CompactFlash  
cards (quick print)  
When images are copied to a CompactFlash card,  
following folders are created and images are saved within  
them.  
Shuttle dial  
CompactFlash card  
01010401  
(2)  
SANYO  
(1)  
IMG00001  
(3)  
00000001.JPG  
00000002.JPG  
00000003.JPG  
Jog dial  
IMG00002  
(3)  
IMG00003  
(3)  
INDEX.HTM  
(4)  
[COPY] button  
(1) A folder with the name “SANYO” is created inside the  
root directory.  
(2) Within "SANYO," a folder with the date on which  
images were copied to is created.  
1 Insert a CompactFlash card.  
See P.41 for inserting a CompactFlash card.  
(3) Under the date folder, folders with titles starting from  
“IMG00001” are created. Up to 200 images can be  
saved on each folder.  
(4) To view images on your PC, open the file  
“INDEX.HTM” found in each date folder using a  
browser (i.e., Internet Explorer 5.0 or later). You will  
then be able to view the JPEG images individually or  
in slide show format, etc.  
z Use a FAT16 CompactFlash card. The digital video  
recorder will not recognize FAT32 CompactFlash cards.  
Format cards with the digital video recorder before use.  
2 Pause playback on the image to be  
copied, and then press the [COPY]  
button.  
The <COPY> screen is displayed.  
z Playing video with audio that has been copied to a  
CompactFlash card  
COPY  
Video with audio can be played using DVR Viewer. For  
more details, refer to the “Manual for Remote Operation  
by Network Connection”.  
COPY TO :  
HOW MANY:  
START  
ARCHIVE AREA  
1 PICTURES  
->  
FORMAT  
:
COMPACT FLASH  
FORMAT START  
->  
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE  
3 Turn the jog dial to select “COPY TO”,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“ARCHIVE AREA” flashes.  
COPY TO : ARCHIVE AREA  
HOW MANY:  
START  
1 PCTURES  
->  
FORMAT  
:
COMPACT FLASH  
FORMAT START  
->  
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE  
English  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO  
4 Turn the jog dial to select “CF ->  
PRINT”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
8 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The cursor moves to “HOW MANY”.  
COPY TO :  
HOW MANY:  
START  
CF->PRINT  
1 PICTURES  
->  
CompactFlash card  
DCIM  
100_0406  
101_0406  
102_0406  
00000001.JPG  
00000002.JPG  
00000003.JPG  
FORMAT  
:
COMPACT FLASH  
FORMAT START  
->  
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE  
(1) A folder with the name “DCIM” is created inside the  
root directory.  
5 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise, and  
then turn the jog dial to set “HOW  
MANY”.  
(2) Within “DCIM,” a folder with the date on which images  
were copied to is created.  
COPY TO :  
HOW MANY:  
START  
CF->PRINT  
10 PICTURES  
->  
z Use the “DVP-P1” Sanyo Digital Photo Printer. If  
another printer is used, Sanyo cannot be responsible  
for failures in performance or operation.  
6 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and turn  
the jog dial to set units.  
z If the location of the date needs to be moved when  
printing, change operation display area at copying.  
(JP.16)  
COPY TO :  
HOW MANY:  
START  
CF->PRINT  
10 PICTURES  
->  
When date is hidden, it is not printed.  
z When “CF->PRINT” is selected, copying may take twice  
as long as “COMPACT FLASH”, with approximately 30  
seconds required for each megabyte of data.  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Setting  
Description  
The specified number of images after the speci-  
fied location will be copied.  
z Copies will be limited to 999 when “CF->PRINT” is  
selected.  
PICTURES  
The specified duration in seconds after the spec-  
ified location will be copied.  
Example: Copying ends at 999 even when set to 10  
minutes.  
z Images copied with “CF->PRINT” settings cannot be  
played on the DVR Viewer.  
SECONDS  
MINUTES  
The specified duration in minutes after the speci-  
fied location will be copied.  
7 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The cursor moves to “START”.  
To cancel a copy operation  
Press the [COPY] button to cancel the current copy.  
COPY TO :  
HOW MANY:  
START  
CF->PRINT  
10 PICTURES  
->  
FORMAT  
:
COMPACT FLASH  
FORMAT START  
->  
44  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO  
Copying video to CD-R/RW  
4 Turn the jog dial to select “CD-R/RW”,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
1 Connect a recordable CD-R/RW drive  
and insert a disk.  
The cursor moves to “HOW MANY”.  
COPY TO :  
HOW MANY:  
START  
CD-R/RW  
1 PICTURES  
->  
FORMAT  
:
COMPACT FLASH  
FORMAT START  
->  
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE  
5 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise, and  
then turn the jog dial to set “HOW  
MANY”.  
Any value between 1 and 60 can be set.  
COPY TO :  
HOW MANY:  
START  
CD-R/RW  
60 PICTURES  
->  
z The digital video recorder has one USB terminal on the  
front and one on the back, but they cannot be used  
simultaneously. Connect recordable drive to either  
terminal. If both sides have devices connected, the front  
terminal is prioritized.  
6 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
z Use the recommended CD-R/RW drive.  
“PICTURES” flashes.  
2 Pause playback on the image to be  
copied, and then press the [COPY]  
button.  
COPY TO :  
HOW MANY:  
START  
CD-R/RW  
60 PICTURES  
->  
The <COPY> screen is displayed.  
COPY  
7 Turn the jog dial to select the unit.  
COPY TO :  
HOW MANY:  
START  
ARCHIVE AREA  
1 PICTURES  
->  
COPY TO :  
HOW MANY:  
START  
CD-R/RW  
60 MINUTES  
->  
FORMAT  
:
COMPACT FLASH  
FORMAT START  
->  
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Setting  
Description  
3 Turn the jog dial to select “COPY TO”,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The specified number of images after the speci-  
fied location will be copied.  
PICTURES  
The specified duration in seconds after the spec-  
ified location will be copied.  
SECONDS  
MINUTES  
“ARCHIVE AREA” flashes.  
The specified duration in minutes after the speci-  
fied location will be copied.  
COPY TO : ARCHIVE AREA  
HOW MANY:  
START  
1 PCTURES  
->  
FORMAT  
:
COMPACT FLASH  
FORMAT START  
->  
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE  
English  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO  
Viewing images copied to a CD-R/RW on a PC  
z Up to 40,000 images can be copied in a single  
operation. When specifying the number of images using  
“MINUTES”, copying will end at the point at which  
40,000 images are copied.  
Use the following procedure to view images copied to a  
CD-R/RW on a PC.  
When images are copied to a CD-R/RW the following  
folders are created and images are saved within them.  
z Alarm recordings can only be copied one event at a  
time.  
SANYOCDR (disc name)  
(1)  
01010401  
(3)  
SANYO  
(2)  
IMG00001  
(4)  
00000001.JPG  
00000002.JPG  
00000003.JPG  
IMG00002  
(4)  
8 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The cursor moves to “START”.  
IMG00003  
(4)  
INDEX.HTM  
(5)  
COPY TO :  
HOW MANY:  
START  
CD-R/RW  
60 MINUTES  
->  
(1) CD-R/RW disc is named “SANYOCDR.”  
(2) A folder with the name “SANYO” is created inside  
“SANYOCDR.”  
FORMAT  
:
COMPACT FLASH  
(3) Within "SANYO," a folder with the date on which  
images were copied to is created.  
FORMAT START  
->  
(4) Under the date folder, folders with titles starting from  
“IMG00001” are created. Up to 200 images can be  
saved on each folder.  
9 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
(5) To view images on your PC, open the file  
“INDEX.HTM” found in each date folder using a  
browser (i.e., Internet Explorer 5.0 or later). You will  
then be able to view the JPEG images individually or  
in slide show format, etc.  
(1) Copying to the CD-R/RW starts. The message “COPY  
TO CD-R/RW !” is displayed on-screen at this time.  
Playback with the DVR Viewer is also possible.  
Formatting a CompactFlash card and CD-RW  
COPY TO CD-R/RW ! < 55% >  
Format CompactFlash cards, microdrives, and CD-RW by  
selecting media with “FORMAT” and activating “FORMAT  
START.”  
(2) When this has been completed, “COPY FINISHED !”  
is displayed.  
COPY TO :  
HOW MANY:  
START  
ARCHIVE AREA  
1 PICTURES  
->  
COPY FINISHED !  
< 100% >  
FORMAT  
:
COMPACT FLASH  
FORMAT START  
->  
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE  
To cancel a copy operation  
Copying to the CD-R/RW cannot be cancelled once  
started.  
z CompactFlash capacity is up to 2GB.  
z The USB terminal is for the use of the recommended  
Sanyo CD-R/RW drive (sold separately). Non-  
recommended peripherals cannot be connected.  
z For recommended recordable drives, check the Sanyo  
homepage or ask at your local Sanyo dealer.  
Sanyo website URL:  
z When copying to CD-R/RW drive and “NO CD-R/RW !”  
appears, check that the disc is properly set. If an error  
message appears when set properly, insert a new disc  
and try again.  
http://www.sanyosecurity.com  
46  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 MENU CONFIGURATION AND OPERATIONS  
3 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The sub-menus appear.  
[EXIT/OSD] button  
[MENU] button  
Shuttle dial  
The cursor is positioned on the first setting item.  
4 Turn the jog dial to select a sub-menu,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
Jog dial  
The corresponding setting screen is displayed, and the  
cursor is positioned on the first item.  
This section describes the menu configuration and the  
menu items to be selected for each operation.  
<RECORD SET>  
1.NORMAL REC EASY SET  
2.RECORDING AREA SET  
3.RECORDING CONDITIONS SET  
4.NORMAL REC MODE SET  
5.PROGRAM REC SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
Basic menu operations  
1
Press the [MENU] button.  
6.TIMER SET  
7.ALARM REC MODE SET  
8.ALARM OPERATION SET  
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is  
displayed.  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
MENU  
<MAIN MENU>  
1.INITIAL SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
2.RECORD SET  
<RECORDING AREA SET>  
TOTAL CAPACITY  
NORMAL RECORDING AREA  
3.GENERAL SET  
:
82GB  
80 %  
4.SCREEN SET  
:
:
:
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME  
6.INITIALIZATION LOG  
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS  
AREA FULL RESET  
ALARM RECORDING AREA  
AREA FULL RESET  
ARCHIVE AREA  
->  
19 %  
1 %  
->  
->  
AREA FULL RESET  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
CAUTION : WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,  
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !  
Moving from the <MAIN MENU> to a sub-menu  
or setting screen  
To return to the previous menu  
Turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise.  
2 Turn the jog dial to select a menu.  
Example: 2. RECORD SET  
When you move the cursor, the selected item is displayed  
in reverse.  
<MAIN MENU>  
5 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
1.INITIAL SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
Cursor  
position  
2.RECORD SET  
3.GENERAL SET  
4.SCREEN SET  
the normal screen.  
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME  
6.INITIALIZATION LOG  
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS  
EXIT/OSD  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
z Menus can be opened even during the recording  
process.  
z Menu settings cannot be changed during the recording  
process. Accordingly, recording will have to be stopped  
in order to allow changes to be made.  
English  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
MENU CONFIGURATION AND OPERATIONS  
Movement and confirmation in sub-menus and  
setting screens  
Restoring menu setting items to their  
default values  
The jog dial and shuttle dial are used for movement and  
confirmation in sub-menus and setting screens.  
Use the following procedure to restore only those items in  
the displayed setting screen to their default values.  
(2)  
<RECORDING AREA SET>  
1 Open the screen containing the items to  
be returned to default settings.  
TOTAL CAPACITY  
:
:
82GB  
80 %  
NORMAL RECORDING AREA  
AREA FULL RESET  
ALARM RECORDING AREA  
AREA FULL RESET  
ARCHIVE AREA  
->  
(1)  
:
:
19 %  
1 %  
->  
->  
2 Press the [MENU RESET] button.  
The displayed settings are restored to their default values.  
(3)  
AREA FULL RESET  
CAUTION : WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,  
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !  
To move the cursor  
up or down  
(1)  
Turn the jog dial.  
To move the cursor  
(2) right or to confirm  
an item  
Turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
[MENU RESET] button  
To change a  
(3)  
Turn the jog dial.  
setting value  
Entering numbers with the numeric keys  
Use the [CAMERA SELECT] buttons on the front panel to  
enter numbers and channels (camera numbers). Numbers  
can be entered when “K” is displayed at the top-right of the  
menu screen. (JP.121)  
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/IDIOMA>  
ENGLISH  
K
<CLOCK SET>  
01-01-2004 THU 00:00:00  
<DAYLIGHT SAVING>  
MODE  
:
USE  
MONTH  
04  
WEEK  
TIME  
ON  
OFF  
1ST-SUN  
LST-SUN  
02:00  
02:00  
10  
<EXT.CLOCK SET>  
ADJUST. TIME 01:00  
Numbers to be  
entered  
Button guide  
1 to 9  
0
No. 1 to No. 9 [CAMERA SELECT] buttons  
[QUAD] button  
48  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
MENU CONFIGURATION AND OPERATIONS  
Main menu  
Sub menu  
Turn the jog dial to select the item to  
be set, and then turn the shuttle dial  
<MAIN MENU>  
<RECORD SET>  
clockwise.  
1.INITIAL SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
1.NORMAL REC EASY SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
2.RECORD SET  
2.RECORDING AREA SET  
3.RECORDING CONDITIONS SET  
4.NORMAL REC MODE SET  
5.PROGRAM REC SET  
3.GENERAL SET  
4.SCREEN SET  
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME  
6.INITIALIZATION LOG  
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS  
6.TIMER SET  
7.ALARM REC MODE SET  
8.ALARM OPERATION SET  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
Sub-menu configuration  
The following table indicates the sub-menus or setting screens displayed by selecting items from the <MAIN MENU>.  
The [MENU] button can be used in any sub-menu to scroll through each of the sub-menus in sequence.  
Sub menu  
Setting item  
Settings or display content  
Sets the language displayed on the monitor. Set the date and time  
(1) LANGUAGE/CLOCKSET displayed on the normal screen and daylight saving.  
<INITIAL SET>  
This sub-menu is used to make  
initial settings.  
(JP.51)  
Aligns the time of all digital video recorders in situations where  
multiple recorders are connected.  
<INITIAL SET>  
(2) CAMERA DETECT (  
J
P.54) Automatically detects cameras that have been connected.  
1.LAUNGUAGE/CLOCK SET  
2.CAMERA DETECT  
3.TITLE SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
1
Sets a unique title for each camera so that these can be displayed  
on-screen.  
(3) TITLE SET (JP.55)  
4.HOLIDAY SET  
5.TIME PERIOD SET  
Sets specific dates as holidays to have the operation for Sunday  
used on those days also.  
(4) HOLIDAY SET (JP.56)  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
(5) TIME PERIOD SET  
Sets a time period for automatic camera selection and the switching  
of masking and motion-sensor operations.  
(JP.57)  
(1) NORMAL REC EASY  
Makes basic settings based on a number of days or recording rate.  
SET (JP.60)  
(2) RECORDING AREA SET Displays the total capacity of the hard disk.  
(JP.64)  
Sets the normal recording area, the alarm recording area, the archive area.  
<RECORD SET>  
This sub-menu is used to set  
recording and alarms.  
(3) RECORDING  
CONDITIONS SET  
(JP.67)  
Sets whether overwriting is to be performed (by deleting old video) or  
recording is to be stopped when any of the hard disk’s recording  
areas become full. Also sets series recording and auto delete.  
<RECORD SET>  
(4) NORMAL REC MODE  
Sets the recording quality, audio recording, the recording rate, and  
program recording.  
1.NORMAL REC EASY SET  
2.RECORDING AREA SET  
3.RECORDING CONDITIONS SET  
4.NORMAL REC MODE SET  
5.PROGRAM REC SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
SET (JP.71)  
2
(5) PROGRAM REC SET  
Sets program recording for cameras and the program recording rate.  
6.TIMER SET  
(JP.73)  
7.ALARM REC MODE SET  
8.ALARM OPERATION SET  
Makes timer settings so that operations can be started at a specified  
time or on a specified day.  
(6) TIMER SET (JP.74)  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
(7) ALARM REC MODE SET  
Sets alarm recording, pre-alarm recording, and motion sensors.  
Makes settings for alarms and displays used to detect intruders.  
(JP.77)  
(8) ALARM OPERATION  
SET (JP.84)  
Sets display switching for the operation display area.  
Enables “VIDEO LOSS” to be displayed when the camera video is  
interrupted.  
(1) DISPLAY SET (JP.86)  
<GENERAL SET>  
This sub-menu is used to make  
settings for monitor display and  
the system.  
(2) BUZZER SET (JP.88)  
Turns the buzzer on or off.  
(3) SECURITY LOCK SET  
Sets passwords that restrict use of the digital video recorder to administrators  
and designated users, thus preventing unauthorized operation.  
(JP.89)  
<GENERAL SET>  
1.DISPLAY SET  
2.BUZZER SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
3
Allows confirmation of hard disk capacity and performs initialization.  
Makes the required settings for mirroring.  
(4) HDD SET (JP.92)  
3.SECURITY LOCK SET  
4.HDD SET  
5.NETWORK SET  
6.RS-485 SET  
Makes settings to allow remote setting of the digital video recorder’s menu  
items and remote monitoring of video from a PC via a network (LAN).  
(5) NETWORK SET (JP.93)  
7.CAMERA CONTROL SET  
(6) RS-485 SET (JP.96)  
Makes settings when using RS-485.  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
(7) CAMERA CONTROL  
Makes settings to allow control of the cameras from the digital video  
recorder.  
SET (JP.97)  
English  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
MENU CONFIGURATION AND OPERATIONS  
Sub menu  
Setting item  
Settings or display content  
<SCREEN SET>  
This sub-menu is used to make  
screen settings for monitoring.  
(1) MULTI SCREEN  
Specifies the positions of video from different cameras on the quad,  
multi 9 and 16 screens.  
(JP.100)  
Sets the switching interval for automatic camera selection. Selects  
the cameras to be displayed on both the main monitor and monitor 2  
as a result of automatic selection.  
(2) SEQUENCE SET  
<SCREEN SET>  
(JP.102)  
1.MULTI SCREEN  
:
NORMAL  
->  
QUAD POSITION SET  
4
MULTI 9 POSITION SET  
->  
Sets video from individual cameras to be masked by a gray pattern  
when it is not to be monitored. Turns each channel on and off, and  
sets time synchronization.  
MULTI 16 POSITION SET  
->  
2.SEQUENCE SET  
SEQUENCE SET  
:
1S  
(3) MASK (JP.104)  
->  
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET ->  
3.MASK OFF  
MASK SET  
4.COLOR LEVEL SET  
:
->  
->  
(4) COLOR LEVEL (JP.105) Adjusts the color of video displayed on monitors.  
<POWER LOSS/USED TIME>  
This sub-menu is used to  
confirm the date and time of  
power losses and the amount of  
hard disk usage.  
<POWER LOSS/USED TIME>  
Provides a display of the date and time of power losses and the  
amount of hard disk usage.  
5
(JP.107)  
POWER  
#011  
LOSS  
RECOVER  
01-14 19:15 01-14 09:55  
01-05 21:13 01-14 09:21  
01-03 18:48 01-05 08:56  
01-01 09:49 01-03 10:32  
DISK1 USE : 00096H  
USED TIME  
DISK2 USE : -----H  
POWER  
: 00096H  
F/W: M 0.30-00 / S 0.20-04 / C 0.09-00  
<INITIALIZATION LOG>  
This sub-menu is used to display  
a hard-disk initialization and  
area-reset log.  
<INITIALIZATION LOG>  
DATE  
TIME  
AREA  
6
(JP.108)  
Displays a record of hard-disk initialization and each area resetting.  
10-26  
10-26  
10-26  
10-26  
10-26  
10-26  
10-26  
-----  
18:25  
23:18  
23:18  
23:18  
23:18  
23:16  
23:15  
--:--  
ALL AREAS (INITIALIZED)  
ALL AREAS (INITIALIZED)  
ARCHIVE  
(AREA RESET)  
ALARM REC (AREA RESET)  
NORMAL REC (AREA RESET)  
ALL AREAS (INITIALIZED)  
ALL AREAS (INITIALIZED)  
------  
(------)  
<COPY MENU SETTINGS>  
This sub-menu is used to store  
or load menu settings  
<COPY MENU SETTINGS>  
DVR TYPE VER. SA16-03  
7
(JP.109)  
Saves and loads menu settings.  
SAVE MENUS TO CF  
->  
->  
LOAD MENUS FROM CF  
COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS: NO  
*IF YOU CHOOSE $YES$ OF THE ABOVE MENU,  
HARD DISK WILL BE INITIALIZED !  
50  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 INITIAL SET  
[EXIT/OSD] button  
Shuttle dial  
[MENU] button  
Main Menu  
<MAIN MENU>  
1.INITIAL SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
2.RECORD SET  
3.GENERAL SET  
4.SCREEN SET  
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME  
6.INITIALIZATION LOG  
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS  
Jog dial  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
Setting  
Description  
Ref.  
Initial settings  
<TIMER PERIOD SET>  
TIME PERIOD  
T-1  
T-2  
T-3  
T-4  
The <INITIAL SET> is used to make the following setting.  
<TIME PERIOD SET>  
TIME PERIOD  
TIME PERIOD  
A
B
00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00  
00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00  
Uses a pair of time periods to  
set a time band for operation  
switching and other functions.  
5
P.57  
SELECT TIME PERIOD  
SEQUENCE  
<INITIAL SET>  
TIME PERIOD  
TIME PERIOD  
TIME PERIOD  
A
A
A
MASK  
1.LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET  
2.CAMERA DETECT  
3.TITLE SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
MOTION SENSOR  
4.HOLIDAY SET  
5.TIME PERIOD SET  
Setting the time  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
Setting of the date and time displayed on the normal screen.  
See P.17 for more details.  
Setting  
Description  
Ref.  
<LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET>  
Sets the language displayed  
on the monitor.  
Setting the daylight saving  
1 Press the [MENU] button.  
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is  
displayed.  
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/IDIOMA>  
ENGLISH  
Set the date and time  
<CLOCK SET>  
01-01-2004 THU 00:00:00  
<DAYLIGHT SAVING>  
displayed on the normal  
screen and daylight saving.  
Aligns the time of all digital  
video recorders in situations  
where multiple recorders are  
connected.  
P.16  
P.51  
1
MODE  
:
USE  
MONTH  
04  
WEEK  
TIME  
ON  
OFF  
1ST-SUN  
LST-SUN  
02:00  
02:00  
10  
<EXT.CLOCK SET>  
ADJUST. TIME 01:00  
MENU  
<MAIN MENU>  
1.INITIAL SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
2.RECORD SET  
3.GENERAL SET  
4.SCREEN SET  
<WARNING>  
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME  
6.INITIALIZATION LOG  
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS  
<CAMERA DETECT>  
Automatically detects  
cameras that have been  
connected.  
CAMERA DETECT  
2
3
4
P.54  
P.55  
CONTINUE?  
NO  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
`
<TITLE SET>  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “1. INITIAL  
SET”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
<TITLE SET>  
CAMERA NO.01 ________01  
Sets a unique title for each  
camera so that these can be  
displayed on-screen.  
The <INITIAL SET> screen is displayed.  
<INITIAL SET>  
<HOLIDAY SET>  
<HOLIDAY SET>  
Sets specific dates as  
holidays to have the operation P.56  
for Sunday used on those  
days also.  
1.LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET  
2.CAMERA DETECT  
3.TITLE SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
1. -----  
2. -----  
3. -----  
4. -----  
5. -----  
6. -----  
7. -----  
8. -----  
9. -----  
10. -----  
11. -----  
12. -----  
13. -----  
14. -----  
15. -----  
16. -----  
17. -----  
18. -----  
19. -----  
20. -----  
4.HOLIDAY SET  
5.TIME PERIOD SET  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
English  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
INITIAL SET  
3 Turn the jog dial to select “1.  
LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET”, and then  
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
7 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The cursor moves to the date/time at which to switch from  
standard time to daylight saving.  
The <LANGUAGE/LANGUE/IDIOMA> screen is  
displayed.  
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/IDIOMA>  
ENGLISH  
<CLOCK SET>  
01-01-2004 THU 00:00:56  
<DAYLIGHT SAVING>  
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/IDIOMA>  
ENGLISH  
MODE  
:
USE  
MONTH  
04  
<CLOCK SET>  
WEEK  
TIME  
01-01-2004 THU 00:00:00  
<DAYLIGHT SAVING>  
ON  
OFF  
1ST-SUN  
LST-SUN  
02:00  
02:00  
10  
MODE  
:
USE  
MONTH  
04  
<EXT.CLOCK SET>  
ADJUST. TIME 01:00  
WEEK  
TIME  
ON  
OFF  
1ST-SUN  
LST-SUN  
02:00  
02:00  
10  
<EXT.CLOCK SET>  
ADJUST. TIME 01:00  
When “USE” is selected for <DAYLIGHT SAVING>  
4 Turn the jog dial to select “MODE”  
under <DAYLIGHT SAVING>.  
You can set the date/time at which the time is switched  
from standard time to daylight saving, and the date/time at  
which the time is switched back again.  
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/IDIOMA>  
ENGLISH  
The example below is the default value.  
Example:  
<CLOCK SET>  
01-01-2004 THU 00:00:15  
<DAYLIGHT SAVING>  
After the clock display reaches April 4, 2004, 01:59, the  
next clock display is 03:00, putting the clock an hour  
ahead.  
After the clock display reaches October 31, 2004,  
01:59, the next clock display is 01:00, putting the clock  
an hour behind (back to standard time).  
MODE  
:
USE  
MONTH  
04  
WEEK  
TIME  
ON  
OFF  
1ST-SUN  
LST-SUN  
02:00  
02:00  
10  
<EXT.CLOCK SET>  
ADJUST. TIME 01:00  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
5 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“USE” flashes.  
WEEK MONTH TIME  
ON 1ST-SUN 04 02:00  
OFF LST-SUN 10 02:00  
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/IDIOMA>  
ENGLISH  
<CLOCK SET>  
01-01-2004 THU 00:00:29  
<DAYLIGHT SAVING>  
MODE  
:
USE  
MNTH  
04  
(5)  
(6)  
(7)  
(8)  
WEEK  
TIME  
ON  
OFF  
1ST-SUN  
LST-SUN  
02:00  
02:00  
10  
(1) Sets the week for switching to daylight saving.  
(2) Sets the day of the week.  
(3) Sets the month.  
<EXT.CLOCK SET>  
ADJUST. TIME 01:00  
6 Turn the jog dial to change the settings.  
(4) Sets the time.  
(5) Sets the week for ending daylight saving.  
(6) Sets the day of the week.  
(7) Sets the month.  
[Settings] (indicates setting)  
Setting  
USE  
Description  
Time is automatically adjusted to daylight saving.  
(8) Sets the time.  
Time is not automatically adjusted to daylight  
saving.  
NO USE  
8 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“1ST” flashes.  
9
Turn the jog dial to select the desired week,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The cursor moves to the day of the week.  
10Turn the jog dial to select the desired  
day of the week, and then turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
The cursor moves to the month.  
52  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
INITIAL SET  
11Select month with the jog dial or  
numeric keys and turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
4 Turn the jog dial to select “1.  
LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET”, and then  
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The cursor moves to the time.  
The <LANGUAGE/LANGUE/IDIOMA> screen is  
displayed.  
12Select time with the jog dial or numeric  
keys and turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/IDIOMA>  
ENGLISH  
<CLOCK SET>  
01-01-2004 THU 00:00:00  
<DAYLIGHT SAVING>  
The cursor moves to the minutes portion of the time. Set  
the desired minutes in the same manner.  
Use the same procedure when setting the time at which  
daylight saving is to end. The <DAYLIGHT SAVING>  
settings are now finished.  
MODE  
:
USE  
MONTH  
04  
WEEK  
TIME  
ON  
OFF  
1ST-SUN  
LST-SUN  
02:00  
02:00  
10  
<EXT.CLOCK SET>  
ADJUST. TIME 01:00  
External clock setting  
5 Turn the jog dial and move the cursor to  
“ADJUST. TIME”.  
Alignment of the time of all digital video recorders in  
situations where multiple recorders are connected.  
(Default setting: 01:00)  
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/IDIOMA>  
ENGLISH  
<CLOCK SET>  
At the set time, all connected recorders will be aligned to  
the same time to a precision of seconds.  
01-01-2004 THU 00:00:09  
<DAYLIGHT SAVING>  
MODE  
:
USE  
MONTH  
04  
WEEK  
TIME  
ON  
OFF  
1ST-SUN  
LST-SUN  
02:00  
02:00  
1 Connect the CLOCK SET OUT terminal  
on the rear of the first digital video  
recorder to the CLOCK SET IN of the  
second recorder.  
10  
<EXT.CLOCK SET>  
ADJUST. TIME 01:00  
6 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
CLOCK SET OUT CLOCK SET IN CLOCK SET OUT  
“01” flashes.  
C
C
C
C
7 Set time with the jog dial or numeric  
keys and turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
To C  
terminal  
To CLOCK  
SET IN  
Example: 05:00  
terminal  
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/IDIOMA>  
ENGLISH  
K
2 Press the [MENU] button.  
<CLOCK SET>  
01-01-2004 THU 00:00:24  
<DAYLIGHT SAVING>  
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is  
displayed.  
MODE  
:
USE  
MONTH  
04  
WEEK  
TIME  
ON  
OFF  
1ST-SUN  
LST-SUN  
02:00  
02:00  
MENU  
10  
<EXT.CLOCK SET>  
ADJUST. TIME 05:00  
3 Turn the jog dial to select “1. INITIAL  
SET”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
8 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure for the first digital video recorder is  
ended and the display returns to the normal screen.  
The <INITIAL SET> screen is displayed.  
EXIT/OSD  
<INITIAL SET>  
1.LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET  
2.CAMERA DETECT  
3.TITLE SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
4.HOLIDAY SET  
5.TIME PERIOD SET  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
English  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
INITIAL SET  
9 Use the same procedure to set the time  
for all subsequent recorders.  
Detecting connected cameras  
Use the following procedure to automatically detect  
cameras that have been connected. An “OFF” setting  
should be made for cameras that have not been  
connected.  
When you have finished making the settings, the display  
returns to the normal screen.  
The default setting value is “01:00”.  
1 Press the [MENU] button.  
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is  
z Set the time to the same time of first digital video  
recorder.  
displayed.  
MENU  
z Only an hour value can be set using “ADJUST. TIME”.  
It is not possible to set a value for minutes and seconds.  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “1. INITIAL  
SET”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
The <INITIAL SET> screen is displayed.  
3 Turn the jog dial to select “2. CAMERA  
DETECT”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
<INITIAL SET>  
1.LAUNGUAGE/CLOCK SET  
2.CAMERA DETECT  
3.TITLE SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
4.HOLIDAY SET  
5.TIME PERIOD SET  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
<WARNING> screen is  
displayed.  
<WARNING>  
CAMERA DETECT  
CONTINUE?  
NO  
4 Turn the jog dial to select “YES”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
Connected cameras are automatically detected.  
When detection has been completed, the display returns to  
the <INITIAL SET> screen.  
54  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
INITIAL SET  
5 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
Setting camera titles  
The first position for title setting flashes.  
Use the following procedure to set a unique title for each  
camera so that these titles can be displayed on-screen.  
<TITLE SET>  
CAMERA NO.03 ________03  
Titles can be up to 10 characters in length per camera.  
The following characters can be used.  
z Letters: A to Z  
6 Turn the jog dial to select “H”.  
Characters change in the following sequence as the jog  
dial is turned.  
z Numbers: 0 to 9  
z Symbols: - : . / * _ (space)  
-
:
A
Z
0
9
Example: Setting the title “HALL-1F” for Camera No. 3.  
(space)  
.
/
1 Press the [MENU] button.  
*
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is  
<TITLE SET>  
displayed.  
MENU  
CAMERA NO.03 H_______03  
7 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “1. INITIAL  
SET”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
The character selection is confirmed and the cursor moves  
one position to the right.  
The <INITIAL SET> screen is displayed.  
<TITLE SET>  
CAMERA NO.03 H_______03  
3 Turn the jog dial to select “3. TITLE  
SET”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
z When changing a character, move the cursor to that  
character by turning the shuttle dial clockwise or  
counter-clockwise, and then enter the required  
character.  
The normal monitoring screen is displayed with a title  
setting field in the center.  
8 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to enter the  
remaining characters.  
<TITLE SET>  
<INITIAL SET>  
1.LAUNGUAGE/CLOCK SET  
2.CAMERA DETECT  
3.TITLE SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
4.HOLIDAY SET  
5.TIME PERIOD SET  
CAMERA NO.03 HALL-1F_03  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
9 When you have finished making  
settings, press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
4 Press the No. 3 [CAMERA SELECT]  
button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
The default setting is “-----01” (camera No.).  
The video from Camera No. 3 is displayed on-screen.  
<TITLE SET>  
EXIT/OSD  
CAMERA NO.03 ________03  
English  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
INITIAL SET  
4 Set the month and day for item No. “1”.  
Setting holidays  
1. -----  
Use the following procedure to set specific dates as holidays  
to have the operation for Sunday used on those days also.  
Dates such as national holidays and company off days  
should be set as holidays when you want those dates to  
have the same timer operation as Sundays.  
Day  
No.  
Month  
(1) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise to flash “--” (month).  
(2) Set “--” to “11” with the jog dial or numeric keys.  
[Setting conditions]  
Be sure to always switch “SET” to “ON” after completing  
timer settings for Sunday (i.e., “SUN”). (JP.74)  
1. 11---  
(3) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise to flash “--” (day).  
(4) Set “--” to “17” with the jog dial or numeric keys.  
<TIMER SET>  
WEEK  
SUN  
MON  
TUE  
WED  
THU  
FRI  
SAT  
DLY  
EXT  
START  
08:00  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
*****  
STOP  
PROGRAM  
OFF  
FPS  
SET  
ON  
Settings for  
Sunday  
18:00  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
*****  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
1. 11-17  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
5 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise after  
setting.  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
The cursor moves to “2”.  
Example: Setting November 17 as a holiday  
1. 11-17  
2. -----  
1 Press the [MENU] button.  
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is  
displayed.  
6 Use the same procedure to set other  
holidays.  
MENU  
7 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
The default setting is all “-----”.  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “1. INITIAL  
SET”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
The <INITIAL SET> screen is displayed.  
EXIT/OSD  
<INITIAL SET>  
1.LAUNGUAGE/CLOCK SET  
2.CAMERA DETECT  
3.TITLE SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
4.HOLIDAY SET  
5.TIME PERIOD SET  
z If “DLY” is set using timer settings, timer recording on  
the above-mentioned holidays will also be carried out in  
accordance with daily settings. In other words, “DLY”  
includes Sundays and is given priority over other  
settings.  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
3 Turn the jog dial to select “4. HOLIDAY  
SET”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
The <HOLIDAY SET> screen is displayed with the cursor  
positioned on “1”.  
<HOLIDAY SET>  
1. -----  
2. -----  
3. -----  
4. -----  
5. -----  
6. -----  
7. -----  
8. -----  
9. -----  
10. -----  
11. -----  
12. -----  
13. -----  
14. -----  
15. -----  
16. -----  
17. -----  
18. -----  
19. -----  
20. -----  
56  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
INITIAL SET  
Operations during the specified time periods  
Setting time periods  
The following are functions with operations based on time  
periods.  
When using time periods, be sure to set for each interval  
with the following menu.  
A time period is setup by the two timers TIME PERIOD A  
and TIME PERIOD B, and the following procedure can be  
used to specify four different periods per day based on  
time period settings (for instance, early morning, morning,  
lunchtime, and night). For example, it is possible to set  
TIME PERIOD A for automatic screen selection and the  
period between TIME PERIOD B for the masking of  
monitor video using a gray pattern.  
Setting automatic selection of camera video  
Set which automatically selected camera to display video  
from and the switching interval.  
To do this, set “2.SEQUENCE SET” from <SCREEN  
SET>. (JP.102)  
Morning to lunchtime: 6:00 to 11:00  
Cameras No. 2, 4, 5, 7, 10 and 16 are masked.  
<SEQUENCE SET>  
MAIN MON.  
FULL  
QUAD  
FULL  
:
:
:
1S  
1S  
1S  
MON.2  
01  
05  
09  
13  
02  
06  
10  
14  
03  
07  
11  
15  
04  
08  
12  
16  
INDIVIDUAL INTERVAL (SEC)  
01: 1S  
05: 1S  
09: 1S  
13: 1S  
02: 1S  
06: 1S  
10: 1S  
14: 1S  
03: 1S  
07: 1S  
11: 1S  
15: 1S  
04: 1S  
08: 1S  
12: 1S  
16: 1S  
Masking camera video using a gray pattern  
Use “3.MASK SET” from <SCREEN SET> to specify which  
cameras are to be displayed on the monitor and which are  
not. (JP.104)  
Lunchtime: 11:00 to 13:00  
Cameras No. 1, 4, 6, 11, 12, 13 and 14 are masked.  
<MASK SET>  
01  
05  
09  
13  
02  
06  
10  
14  
03  
07  
11  
15  
04  
08  
12  
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (06:00-11:30)  
CH  
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08  
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
MON.2  
NETWORK  
CH  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
MON.2  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
16  
NETWORK  
Lunchtime to night: 13:00 to 20:00  
Cameras No. 1, 5, 9, 12 automatic selection is carried out.  
Alarm recording using motion sensors  
Alarm recording is activated by motion sensor.  
To detect camera alarms, set “MOTION SENSOR” from  
<ALARM REC MODE SET>. (JP.81)  
01  
05  
09  
12  
Night to morning: 20:00 to 6:00  
Cameras No. 1, 8 and 16 automatic selection is carried  
out.  
CH01 T-1  
LEVEL : OFF  
MODE : A  
01  
08  
16  
English  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
INITIAL SET  
3 Turn the jog dial to select “5. TIME  
PERIOD SET”, and then turn the shuttle  
dial clockwise.  
Time period settings  
Example 1: Setting periods using TIME PERIOD A and  
TIME PERIOD B  
The <TIME PERIOD SET> screen is displayed.  
z TIME PERIOD A settings  
Set T-1 to 6 AM (6:00)  
<TIMER PERIOD SET>  
TIME PERIOD  
T-1  
T-2  
T-3  
T-4  
TIME PERIOD A 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00  
TIME PERIOD B 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00  
Set T-2 to 11:30 AM (11:30)  
Set T-3 to 1:30 PM (13:30)  
Set T-4 to 6 PM (18:00)  
z TIME PERIOD B settings  
Set T-1 to 6 AM (6:00)  
SELECT TIME PERIOD  
SEQUENCE  
MASK  
TIME PERIOD A  
TIME PERIOD A  
TIME PERIOD A  
MOTION SENSOR  
Set T-2 to 8 AM (8:00)  
Set T-3 to 2:30 PM (14:30)  
Set T-4 to 8 PM (20:00)  
4 Turn the jog dial to select “TIME  
PERIOD A”, and then turn the shuttle  
dial clockwise.  
z “T-1” to “T-4” sets the start time of interval.  
“00:” from T-1 flashes (indicating the hour).  
<TIMER PERIOD SET>  
<TIMER PERIOD SET>  
K
TIME PERIOD  
T-1  
T-2  
T-3  
T-4  
TIME PERIOD  
T-1  
T-2  
T-3  
T-4  
TIME PERIOD A 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00  
TIME PERIOD B 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00  
TIME PERIOD A 00:0 00:00 00:00 00:00  
TIME PERIOD B 0:00 00:00 00:00 00:00  
SELECT TIME PERIOD  
SEQUENCE  
MASK  
TIME PERIOD A  
TIME PERIOD A  
TIME PERIOD A  
5 Set T-1 (indicating the hour) to “06” with  
the jog dial or numeric keys and turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
MOTION SENSOR  
“:00” from T-1 flashes (indicating the minutes).  
1 Press the [MENU] button.  
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is  
6 Set T-1 (indicating the minutes) to “00”  
with the jog dial or numeric keys and  
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
displayed.  
“00:” from T-2 flashes (indicating the hour).  
MENU  
7 Set T-2 (indicating the hour) to “11” with  
the jog dial or numeric keys and turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “1. INITIAL  
SET”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
“:00” from T-2 flashes (indicating the minutes).  
<TIMER PERIOD SET>  
T-1 T-2  
K
The <INITIAL SET> screen is displayed.  
TIME PERIOD  
T-3  
T-4  
TIME PERIOD A 06:00 00:00 00:00 00:00  
TIME PERIOD B 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00  
<INITIAL SET>  
1.LAUNGUAGE/CLOCK SET  
2.CAMERA DETECT  
3.TITLE SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
8 Set T-2 (indicating the minutes) to “30”  
with the jog dial or numeric keys and  
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
4.HOLIDAY SET  
5.TIME PERIOD SET  
“00:” from T-3 flashes (indicating the hour).  
Repeat steps 4 through 7 to make hour and minute  
settings for T-3 and T-4.  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
58  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
INITIAL SET  
9 In the same manner as described set  
the hours and minutes of T-1, T-2, T-3,  
and T-4 for “TIME PERIOD B” settings.  
1 Turn the jog dial to move the cursor to  
“SEQUENCE” within “SELECT TIME  
PERIOD”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
<TIMER PERIOD SET>  
TIME PERIOD  
T-1  
T-2  
T-3  
T-4  
“TIME PERIOD A” flashes.  
TIME PERIOD A 06:00 11:30 13:30 18:00  
TIME PERIOD B 06:00 08:00 14:30 20:00  
SELECT TIME PERIOD  
SEQUENCE  
MASK  
TIME PERIOD A  
TIME PERIOD A  
TIME PERIOD A  
MOTION SENSOR  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “TIME  
PERIOD A”, and then turn the shuttle  
dial clockwise.  
For both TIME PERIOD A and TIME PERIOD B, all  
settings are “00:00” by default.  
The cursor moves to “MASK”.  
z Settings for T-1 through T-4 cannot be made in such a  
way that they extend over two days (i.e., include  
midnight).  
<TIMER PERIOD SET>  
TIME PERIOD  
T-1  
T-2  
T-3  
T-4  
TIME PERIOD A 06:00 11:30 13:30 18:00  
TIME PERIOD B 06:00 08:00 14:30 20:00  
Example:  
T-1  
06:00  
T-2  
12:00  
T-3  
18:00  
T-4  
02:00  
SELECT TIME PERIOD  
SEQUENCE  
MASK  
TIME PERIOD A  
TIME PERIOD A  
TIME PERIOD A  
In the above example, setting is not possible between  
T-3 and T-4 due to the change in the date.  
z Any setting of “00:00” for T-2 through T-4 will be  
skipped. If “00:00” (midnight) must be set, this should  
be done using T-1.  
MOTION SENSOR  
3 Set the time period for “MASK” and  
“MOTION SENSOR” in the same way.  
Example:  
T-1  
06:00  
T-2  
12:00  
T-3  
18:00  
T-4  
00:00  
In the above example, T-4 (00:00) is skipped and T-3  
operates between 18:00 and 06:00.  
z Furthermore, when T-1 through T-4 are all set to  
“00:00”, all but T-1 are ignored, and T-1 operates from  
midnight to midnight.  
4 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
Automatic selection, masking, and motion sensors are all  
set to “TIME PERIOD A” by default.  
Time period operations settings  
EXIT/OSD  
Example 2: Setting time period operation as follows.  
Automatic selection and monitor masking for “TIME  
PERIOD A”.  
Motion sensing for “TIME PERIOD B”.  
z As a result of the above operations, “SEQUENCE” are  
updated using main monitor and monitor 2 settings on  
P.102; “MASK” are updated using mask settings from on  
P.104; and “MOTION SENSOR” are updated using  
motion sensor settings on P.81.  
<TIMER PERIOD SET>  
TIME PERIOD  
T-1  
T-2  
T-3  
T-4  
TIME PERIOD A 06:00 11:30 13:30 18:00  
TIME PERIOD B 06:00 08:00 14:30 20:00  
SELECT TIME PERIOD  
SEQUENCE  
MASK  
TIME PERIOD A  
TIME PERIOD A  
TIME PERIOD A  
MOTION SENSOR  
English  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 RECORD SET  
ALARM FULL indicator  
[EXIT/OSD] button  
Shuttle dial  
FULL indicator  
Main Menu  
[MENU] button  
<MAIN MENU>  
1.INITIAL SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
2.RECORD SET  
3.GENERAL SET  
4.SCREEN SET  
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME  
6.INITIALIZATION LOG  
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
[CAMERA SELECT] buttons  
Jog dial  
[TIMER] button  
Setting  
Description  
Ref  
Settings for recording  
<TIMER SET>  
<TIMER SET>  
Makes timer settings so that  
operations can be started at a P.74  
specified time or on a  
WEEK  
SUN  
MON  
TUE  
WED  
THU  
FRI  
SAT  
DLY  
EXT  
START  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
*****  
STOP  
PROGRAM  
OFF  
FPS  
SET  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
*****  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
The <RECORD SET> is used to make the following settings.  
OFF  
OFF  
6
7
8
OFF  
OFF  
<RECORD SET>  
OFF  
OFF  
1.NORMAL REC EASY SET  
2.RECORDING AREA SET  
3.RECORDING CONDITIONS SET  
4.NORMAL REC MODE SET  
5.PROGRAM REC SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
OFF  
specified day.  
OFF  
<ALARM REC MODE SET>  
ALARM RECORDING  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
ALARM INTERLEAVE  
:
:
:
:
OFF  
<ALARM REC MODE SET>  
Sets alarm recording, pre-  
alarm recording, and motion  
ENHANCED  
OFF  
6.TIMER SET  
ONLY  
7.ALARM REC MODE SET  
8.ALARM OPERATION SET  
P.77  
REC RATE:  
15FPS,  
DURATION: 20SEC  
***  
DURATION: ****  
PRE-ALARM RECORDING  
REC RATE: **** FPS,  
:
=> (01731 ALARMS CAN BE RECORDED)  
sensors.  
ALARM TRIGGER  
MOTION SENSOR  
:
ALARM  
->  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
<ALARM OPERATION SET>  
ALARM RETRIGGER  
:
OFF  
<ALARM OPERATION SET>  
Makes settings for operation  
and display upon detecting an  
Setting  
Description  
Ref  
MAIN MON. DISPLAY  
ALARM PRIORITY  
MON.2 DISPLAY  
:
:
:
NC  
P.84  
LAST  
OFF  
<NORMAL REC EASY SET>  
RECORDING DURATION BASE  
REC RATE BASE  
->  
->  
alarm.  
<NORMAL REC EASY SET>  
Makes basic settings based  
on a number of days or a rate.  
1
2
P.60  
CAUTION  
!
CONNECT CAMERA AND SET TIME  
BEFORE SETUP  
Normal recording easy setup  
<RECORDING AREA SET>  
Displays the total capacity of  
the hard disk.  
Sets the normal recording  
area, the alarm recording  
area, and the archive area.  
<RECORDING AREA SET>  
TOTAL CAPACITY  
NORMAL RECORDING AREA  
:
:
82GB  
Use the following procedures to make simple recording  
settings. Two different setting methods may be used -- one  
based on recording days; the other based on recording rate.  
80  
19  
1
%
%
%
AREA FULL RESET  
ALARM RECORDING AREA  
AREA FULL RESET  
ARCHIVE AREA  
->  
:
:
P.64  
P.67  
->  
->  
AREA FULL RESET  
CAUTION  
:
WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,  
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED  
!
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>  
Sets whether overwriting is to be  
performed (by deleting old video)  
or recording is to be stopped  
when any of the hard disk’s  
recording areas become full.  
Also sets the auto delete and  
series recording.  
z Before making easy setup settings, connect the  
camera(s) to the digital video recorder and then always  
perform “CAMERA DETECT”. (JP.54)  
When easy setup settings and individual settings are both  
set, the most recent settings override previous settings.  
z Easy setup settings will be cancelled as a result of the  
following operations.  
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>  
NORMAL RECORDING AREA  
OVERWRITE  
:
:
ON  
ON  
ALARM RECORDING AREA  
OVERWRITE  
3
REMAINING DISK WARNING  
SERIES REC  
:
:
:
**  
z
OFF  
OFF  
AUTO DELETE  
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>  
(1) When the number of cameras detected using “CAMERA  
DETECT” is greater or less than the number of cameras  
previously stored in the digital video recorder.  
(2) When the setting for “PRE-ALARM RECORDING” from  
the <ALARM REC MODE SET> screen is changed.  
(3) When menu settings are loaded from a CompactFlash card.  
(4) When a new easy setup setting operation is carried out.  
(5) When setting values are changed for normal recording  
or timer recording.  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
REC RATE 15FPS  
REC PROGRAM GROUP  
:
:
ENHANCED  
OFF  
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>  
Sets the picture quality, audio  
recording, the recording rate,  
and the program period.  
:
(
35H)  
:
OFF  
4
5
P.71  
P.73  
<PROGRAM REC SET>  
PROGRAM  
:
P-1  
<PROGRAM REC SET>  
Sets program recording for  
cameras.  
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE(FPS)  
01: 0.5  
05: 0.5  
09: 0.5  
13: 0.5  
02: 0.5  
06: 0.5  
10: 0.5  
14: 0.5  
03: 0.5  
07: 0.5  
11: 0.5  
15: 0.5  
04: 0.5  
08: 0.5  
12: 0.5  
16: 0.5  
NORMAL REC  
:
65H  
(6) When the area is changed using the <RECORDING  
AREA SET> screen.  
60  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
1 Press the [MENU] button.  
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is  
displayed.  
z Confirm that the number of cameras connected to the  
digital video recorder is the same as the number of  
displayed recording cameras. If this is not the case,  
check the wiring between cameras and the digital video  
recorder and then carry out “CAMERA DETECT”.  
(JP.54)  
MENU  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “2. RECORD  
SET”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
5 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“1” flashes.  
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.  
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>  
K
RECORDING DURATION  
TIMER RECORDING(DLY)  
START --:--  
:
:
1 DAYS  
OFF  
<RECORD SET>  
1.NORMAL REC EASY SET  
2.RECORDING AREA SET  
3.RECORDING CONDITIONS SET  
4.NORMAL REC MODE SET  
5.PROGRAM REC SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
STOP --:--  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
:
:
ENHANCED  
OFF  
NUMBER OF CAMERAS  
REC RATE  
:
:
2
6.TIMER SET  
7.ALARM REC MODE SET  
8.ALARM OPERATION SET  
10 FPS/CAM  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
6 Set RECORDING DURATION with the  
jog dial or numeric keys and turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
3 Turn the jog dial to select “1. NORMAL  
REC EASY SET”, and then turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
The cursor moves to “TIMER RECORDING (DLY)”.  
The <NORMAL REC EASY SET> screen is displayed.  
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>  
RECORDING DURATION  
TIMER RECORDING(DLY)  
START --:--  
:
:
1 DAYS  
OFF  
<NORMAL REC EASY SET>  
STOP --:--  
RECORDING DURATION BASE  
REC RATE BASE  
->  
->  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
:
:
ENHANCED  
OFF  
NUMBER OF CAMERAS  
REC RATE  
:
:
2
CAUTION !  
CONNECT CAMERA AND SET TIME  
BEFORE SETUP  
10 FPS/CAM  
7 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“OFF” flashes.  
Setting based on recording days  
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>  
RECORDING DURATION  
TIMER RECORDING(DLY)  
START --:--  
:
:
1 DAYS  
OFF  
4 Turn the jog dial to select “RECORDING  
DURATION BASE”, and then turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
STOP --:--  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
:
:
ENHANCED  
OFF  
NUMBER OF CAMERAS  
REC RATE  
:
:
2
The <RECORDING DURATION BASE> screen is  
displayed with the cursor positioned on “RECORDING  
DURATION”.  
10 FPS/CAM  
The number of detected cameras is indicated by  
“NUMBER OF CAMERAS”.  
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>  
RECORDING DURATION  
TIMER RECORDING(DLY)  
START --:--  
:
:
-- DAYS  
OFF  
STOP --:--  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
:
:
ENHANCED  
OFF  
NUMBER OF CAMERAS  
REC RATE  
:
:
2
------FPS/CAM  
English  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
8 To activate timer operation, turn the jog  
dial to select “ON”, and then turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
10Set “AUDIO RECORDING”.  
Example: ON  
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>  
RECORDING DURATION  
TIMER RECORDING(DLY)  
START --:--  
:
:
1 DAYS  
OFF  
The cursor moves to “START”.  
If timer recording has been set to “ON”, set the timer’s  
“START” and “STOP” with the jog dial or numeric keys.  
STOP --:--  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
:
:
ENHANCED  
OFF  
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>  
NUMBER OF CAMERAS  
REC RATE  
:
:
2
RECORDING DURATION  
TIMER RECORDING(DLY)  
START --:--  
:
:
1 DAYS  
ON  
10 FPS/CAM  
STOP --:--  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
:
:
ENHANCED  
OFF  
NUMBER OF CAMERAS  
REC RATE  
:
:
2
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
10 FPS/CAM  
Setting  
OFF  
ON  
Description  
Audio recording is not carried out.  
Audio recording is carried out.  
The following settings are carried out with the shuttle  
dial and jog dial.  
z Vertical cursor movement: Turn the jog dial.  
z Cursor movement to the right: Turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
z Modification of values: Turn the shuttle dial clockwise,  
and then with the setting value flashing, turn the jog  
dial.  
z Audio recording can only be specified when the total  
recording rate for all cameras is 1.00 FPS or greater.  
z When set to “ON”, the letter “A (indicating that audio will  
be recorded)” is displayed in front of recording rate. As  
both video and audio will be stored in the normal  
recording area, this area’s overall capacity will reduce  
accordingly.  
z Confirmation of values: Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
9 Set “PICTURE QUALITY”.  
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>  
RECORDING DURATION  
TIMER RECORDING(DLY)  
START --:--  
:
:
1 DAYS  
OFF  
11Turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise.  
The <WARNING> screen is displayed.  
STOP --:--  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
:
:
ENHANCED  
OFF  
NUMBER OF CAMERAS  
REC RATE  
:
:
2
<WARNING>  
10 FPS/CAM  
REC RATE SETTING IN THE MENU WILL BE  
AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTED.  
ARE YOU SURE ?  
NO  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Setting  
BASIC (BA)  
Description  
15 kB  
22 kB  
30 kB  
42 kB  
50 kB  
CHANGE:JOG  
SET:SHUTTLE  
NORMAL (NO)  
ENHANCED(EN)  
FINE (FI)  
12Turn the jog dial to select “YES”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
SUPER FINE (SF)  
The display returns to the <NORMAL REC EASY SET>  
screen.  
13Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
EXIT/OSD  
62  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
6 Turn the jog dial to select “REC RATE”,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
z The recording rate is automatically calculated based on  
recording settings and the number of connected  
cameras, and this is indicated by “REC RATE”. All  
cameras will record at this rate. If a valid figure cannot  
be calculated, “ERROR!” will be displayed.  
z When easy setup settings and individual settings are  
both set, the most recent settings override previous  
settings.  
Set the recording rate for each individual camera.  
The cursor moves to “TIMER RECORDING (DLY)”.  
<REC RATE BASE>  
REC RATE  
: 30.000 FPS/CAM  
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : OFF  
START --:--  
STOP --:--  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
: ENHANCED  
: OFF  
z Easy setup settings cannot be used with program  
recording or day-specific timer recording.  
NUMBER OF CAMERAS  
RECORDING DURATION  
: 2  
:
0 DAYS  
Setting based on recording rate  
7 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“OFF” flashes.  
4 Turn the jog dial to select “REC RATE  
BASE”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
<REC RATE BASE>  
REC RATE  
: 30.000 FPS/CAM  
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : OFF  
The <REC RATE BASE> screen is displayed with the  
cursor positioned on “REC RATE”.  
START --:--  
STOP --:--  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
: ENHANCED  
: OFF  
The number of detected cameras is indicated by  
“NUMBER OF CAMERAS”.  
NUMBER OF CAMERAS  
RECORDING DURATION  
: 2  
:
0 DAYS  
<REC RATE BASE>  
REC RATE  
: ----- FPS/CAM  
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : OFF  
START --:--  
STOP --:--  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
: ENHANCED  
: OFF  
8 To activate timer operation, turn the jog  
dial to select “ON”, and then turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
NUMBER OF CAMERAS  
RECORDING DURATION  
: 2  
: ---- DAYS  
The cursor moves to “START”.  
If timer recording has been set to “ON”, set the timer’s  
“START” and “STOP” with the jog dial or numeric keys.  
z Confirm that the number of cameras connected to the  
digital video recorder is the same as the number of  
displayed recording cameras. If this is not the case,  
check the wiring between cameras and the digital video  
recorder and then carry out “CAMERA DETECT”.  
(JP.54)  
<REC RATE BASE>  
REC RATE  
: 30.000 FPS/CAM  
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : ON  
START --:--  
STOP --:--  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
: ENHANCED  
: OFF  
NUMBER OF CAMERAS  
RECORDING DURATION  
: 2  
:
0 DAYS  
5 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“30.000” flashes.  
The following settings are carried out with the shuttle  
dial and jog dial.  
<REC RATE BASE>  
REC RATE  
: 30.000 FPS/CAM  
z Vertical cursor movement: Turn the jog dial.  
z Cursor movement to the right: Turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : OFF  
START --:--  
STOP --:--  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
: ENHANCED  
: OFF  
z Modification of values: Turn the shuttle dial clockwise,  
and then with the setting value flashing, turn the jog  
dial.  
NUMBER OF CAMERAS  
RECORDING DURATION  
: 2  
:
0 DAYS  
z Confirmation of values: Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
9 Set “PICTURE QUALITY”.  
See P.62.  
English  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
10Set “AUDIO RECORDING”.  
Displaying the recording areas  
See P.62.  
Use the following procedures to confirm the hard disk’s  
total recording capacity and also the allocation for each  
recording area.  
11Turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise.  
The <WARNING> screen is displayed.  
1 Press the [MENU] button.  
<WARNING>  
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is  
displayed.  
REC RATE SETTING IN THE MENU WILL BE  
AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTED.  
ARE YOU SURE ?  
NO  
MENU  
CHANGE:JOG  
SET:SHUTTLE  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD  
SET”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
12Turn the jog dial to select “YES”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.  
The display returns to the <NORMAL REC EASY SET>  
screen.  
13Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
3 Turn the jog dial to select “2.  
RECORDING AREA SET”, and then turn  
the shuttle dial clockwise.  
EXIT/OSD  
The <RECORDING AREA SET> screen is displayed.  
<RECORDING AREA SET>  
(1)  
(2)  
TOTAL CAPACITY  
:
:
82GB  
80 %  
z The recording rate is automatically calculated based on  
recording settings and the number of connected  
cameras, and this is indicated by “RECORDING  
DURATION”. If a valid figure cannot be calculated,  
“ERROR!” will be displayed.  
NORMAL RECORDING AREA  
AREA FULL RESET  
ALARM RECORDING AREA  
AREA FULL RESET  
ARCHIVE AREA  
->  
(3)  
:
:
19 %  
1 %  
->  
->  
(4)  
AREA FULL RESET  
z When simple recording settings and individual settings  
are both set, the most recent settings override previous  
settings.  
CAUTION : WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,  
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !  
z Easy setup settings cannot be used with program  
recording or day-specific timer recording.  
Displays the total capacity  
of the hard disk.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
Normal  
recording  
area  
Sets the capacity of the  
normal recording area.  
Alarm  
recording  
area  
Sets the capacity of the  
alarm recording area.  
Sets the capacity of the  
archive area.  
Archive area  
64  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
Total capacity following hard disk expansion.  
z A maximum of 16,000 alarm recordings can be made  
on one hard disk. If hard disk expansion is carried out,  
this number can be increased to 32,000. Note,  
however, that menu settings and display content will  
have an effect on the maximum number of recordings  
that can be made in reality.  
z When the normal recording area is set to “*0%”  
Alarm recording can be performed for as long as space  
is left in the alarm recording area.  
When “MIRRORING” (JP.93) is set using “4. HDD SET”,  
the total capacity display will change as follows.  
z If “MIRRORING” is “OFF”, the capacity for hard-disk  
expansion is displayed.  
z If “MIRRORING” is “ON”, the capacity of the smallest  
hard-disk is displayed.  
z The setting for the archive area cannot be modified  
directly.  
When changes are made for the normal recording area  
or the alarm recording area, automatic settings will be  
made within a maximum range of 10 GB.  
When searching for video, this area can be searched in  
the same way as the normal recording area using time/  
date searches, fast-forward play, and fast-reverse play.  
Alarm search, alarm thumbnail search, motion detection  
search, and alarm skip will not be available.  
Default hard disk settings  
By default, the normal recording area is set to 80%; the  
alarm recording area is set to 19%; and the archive area is  
set to 1%. The maximum capacity of the archive area is 10  
GB.  
Example:  
Setting the normal recording area to 50% and the  
alarm recording area to 49%  
1 Turn the jog dial to select the “NORMAL  
RECORDING AREA”, and then turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
Alarm  
recording  
area  
Archive area  
1%  
“80%” flashes.  
19%  
80%  
<RECORDING AREA SET>  
TOTAL CAPACITY  
:
:
82GB  
80 %  
Normal recording  
area  
NORMAL RECORDING AREA  
AREA FULL RESET  
ALARM RECORDING AREA  
AREA FULL RESET  
ARCHIVE AREA  
->  
:
:
19 %  
1 %  
->  
->  
Hard Disk Recording Areas  
AREA FULL RESET  
CAUTION : WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,  
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !  
z When the recording area settings are changed, the disk  
is initialized and all current recordings are erased. It is  
important, therefore, to store recorded video on a PC or  
some other storage media before modifying recording  
areas.  
2 Turn the jog dial to set “NORMAL  
RECORDING AREA” to 50%, and then  
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The cursor moves to “ALARM RECORDING AREA”.  
<RECORDING AREA SET>  
TOTAL CAPACITY  
:
:
82GB  
50 %  
Changing recording areas  
NORMAL RECORDING AREA  
AREA FULL RESET  
ALARM RECORDING AREA  
AREA FULL RESET  
ARCHIVE AREA  
->  
:
:
38 %  
12 %  
Recording area allocations  
->  
->  
The highest possible allocation for the normal recording  
area and the alarm recording area is 99%.  
The allocation for the archive area cannot be set  
manually.This allocation will be automatically set to at least  
1%.  
AREA FULL RESET  
CAUTION : WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,  
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !  
The following settings are carried out with the shuttle  
dial and jog dial.  
z Vertical cursor movement: Turn the jog dial.  
If the normal recording area is set to 0%  
If set to 0%, it will not be possible to record video to the  
normal recording area. As video will only be recorded to  
the alarm recording area in this type of case, the area  
allocations should be reviewed and set accordingly.  
z
z
Cursor movement to the right: Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
Modification of values: Turn the shuttle dial clockwise,  
and then with the setting value flashing, turn the jog dial.  
z Confirmation of values: Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
English  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
3 Set “ALARM RECORDING AREA” to  
49% and turn the shuttle dial to the  
right.  
6 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
(1) The hard disk is initialized.  
The cursor moves to “AREA FULL RESET.”  
<RECORDING AREA SET>  
HDD INITIALIZING !  
TOTAL CAPACITY  
:
:
82GB  
50 %  
NORMAL RECORDING AREA  
AREA FULL RESET  
ALARM RECORDING AREA  
AREA FULL RESET  
ARCHIVE AREA  
->  
:
:
49 %  
1 %  
->  
->  
AREA FULL RESET  
(2) The <RECORD SET> screen appears and the  
modified recording capacities are adopted.  
CAUTION : WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,  
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !  
7 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
4 Turn the shuttle dial counter- clockwise.  
The <WARNING> screen is displayed. The screen  
contains a message regarding initialization of the hard  
disk.  
the normal screen.  
EXIT/OSD  
<WARNING>  
THIS CHANGE WILL INITIALIZE THE DISK.  
ALL RECORDING WILL BE ERASED.  
ARE YOU SURE ?  
Setting overwrite permission  
NO  
Set whether to continue recording and automatically  
overwrite data, or stop recording and not overwrite data  
when the normal recording area and alarm recording area  
become full (Setting recording conditions (JP.67)). Default  
setting is to automatically overwrite.  
If the setting to not overwrite is selected, recording stops at  
the point where remaining capacity runs out. In this case,  
recording can be continued using the following steps to  
authorize overwriting.  
CHANGE:JOG  
SET:SHUTTLE  
5 To change the recording area, turn the  
jog dial to display “YES”.  
<WARNING>  
THIS CHANGE WILL INITIALIZE THE DISK.  
ALL RECORDING WILL BE ERASED.  
ARE YOU SURE ?  
Also, data is not overwritten automatically to archive area.  
Follow the steps below to authorize overwriting each time  
data is full.  
YES  
1 Set the items in “Setting overwriting for  
the normal recording area”. (JP.67)  
CHANGE:JOG  
SET:SHUTTLE  
Set “OVERWRITE” to “OFF.”  
z If the shuttle dial is turned clockwise while “NO” is  
selected, the <RECORDING AREA SET> screen will  
be displayed and the recording capacities will revert to  
their previous settings. In other words, the new settings  
will not be adopted.  
66  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “2.  
RECORDING AREA SET” from the  
<RECORD SET> screen, and then turn  
the shuttle dial clockwise.  
z To perform overwriting automatically, set  
“OVERWRITE” for either “NORMAL RECORDING  
AREA” or “ALARM RECORDING AREA” from  
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET> screen to “ON”.  
(JP.67)  
The <RECORDING AREA SET> screen is displayed.  
<RECORDING AREA SET>  
TOTAL CAPACITY  
:
:
82GB  
80 %  
NORMAL RECORDING AREA  
AREA FULL RESET  
ALARM RECORDING AREA  
AREA FULL RESET  
ARCHIVE AREA  
->  
z Whenever “AREA FULL RESET” is performed for  
“NORMAL RECORDING AREA” or “ALARM  
RECORDING AREA”, the video recorded in the  
corresponding area will be overwritten.  
z Images in the archive area are erased when “AREA  
FULL RESET” is performed for the archive area.  
:
:
19 %  
1 %  
->  
->  
AREA FULL RESET  
CAUTION : WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,  
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !  
3 Turn the jog dial to select “AREA FULL  
RESET”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
Setting recording conditions  
Use the following setting procedure to indicate whether  
overwriting is to be performed (deleting old video) or  
recording is to be stopped when any of the hard disk’s  
recording areas become full.  
“NO” on the <WARNING> screen flashes.  
<WARNING>  
AREA FULL RESET  
ARCHIVE AREA  
Setting overwriting for the normal recording  
area  
ARE YOU SURE ?  
NO  
Flashing  
1 Turn the jog dial to select  
“OVERWRITE” for normal recording  
area, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
CHANGE:JOG  
SET:SHUTTLE  
4 Turn the jog dial to select “YES”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“ON” flashes.  
“NORMAL RECORDING AREA” is set to overwrite once.  
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>  
NORMAL RECORDING AREA  
OVERWRITE  
: ON  
5 Use the same procedure to make  
settings for the “ALARM RECORDING  
AREA”.  
ALARM RECORDING AREA  
OVERWRITE  
: ON  
REMAINING DISK WARNING  
SERIES REC  
: **  
: OFF  
: OFF  
AUTO DELETE  
<RECORDING AREA SET>  
TOTAL CAPACITY  
:
:
82GB  
80 %  
NORMAL RECORDING AREA  
AREA FULL RESET  
ALARM RECORDING AREA  
AREA FULL RESET  
ARCHIVE AREA  
->  
:
:
19 %  
1 %  
->  
->  
AREA FULL RESET  
CAUTION : WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,  
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !  
6 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
EXIT/OSD  
English  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
2 Turn the jog dial to select setting (OFF,  
for example), and then turn the shuttle  
dial clockwise.  
6 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
EXIT/OSD  
“REMAINING DISK WARNING” changes to “1%” from “**”.  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Setting  
Description  
Turn “OVERWRITE” to “OFF” to display the remaining  
memory for the current recording area on the operating  
display.  
Recording is stopped when the normal recording area  
becomes full.  
OFF  
Also, if remaining memory reaches the set percentage, the  
FULL indictor flashes for normal recording area and the  
ALARM FULL indicator flashes for the alarm recording  
area. When the remaining memory runs out, the indicator  
switches to a permanently lit condition and recording stops  
automatically.  
Overwriting automatically starts from the beginning of  
the normal recording area when it becomes full.  
ON  
.
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>  
NORMAL RECORDING AREA  
OVERWRITE  
: OFF  
ALARM RECORDING AREA  
OVERWRITE  
: ON  
FULL indicator  
ALARM FULL indicator  
REMAINING DISK WARNING  
SERIES REC  
:
1 %  
Remaining disk  
warning  
: OFF  
: OFF  
AUTO DELETE  
Operation  
display area  
Remaining  
capacity  
display  
z If this is set to “OFF”, the FULL indicator or ALARM  
FULL indicator will start to flash when the remaining  
hard-disk capacity reaches the percentage set for  
“REMAINING DISK WARNING”.  
01-01-04 00:00:00 REC 1%  
02  
EN A ALARM 0000  
3 Use the same procedure to set “ALARM  
RECORDING AREA” to “OFF”.  
When the normal recording area or the alarm  
recording area become full  
Make a new “AREA FULL RESET” setting for “NORMAL  
RECORDING AREA” and “ALARM RECORDING AREA”  
on the <RECORDING AREA SET> screen. (JP.66)  
4 Turn the jog dial to select “REMAINING  
DISK WARNING”, and then turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
<RECORDING AREA SET>  
5 Turn the jog dial to set the remaining  
capacity, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
TOTAL CAPACITY  
:
:
82GB  
80 %  
NORMAL RECORDING AREA  
AREA FULL RESET  
ALARM RECORDING AREA  
AREA FULL RESET  
ARCHIVE AREA  
->  
:
:
19 %  
1 %  
->  
->  
The remaining capacity can be set anywhere between 1%  
(default) and 10%.  
AREA FULL RESET  
CAUTION : WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,  
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !  
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>  
NORMAL RECORDING AREA  
OVERWRITE  
: OFF  
ALARM RECORDING AREA  
OVERWRITE  
: OFF  
REMAINING DISK WARNING  
SERIES REC  
:
1 %  
: OFF  
: OFF  
AUTO DELETE  
68  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
3 Connecting audio input terminals.  
Setting series recording  
For audio recording, connect audio devices such as amps  
and microphones to the various digital audio recorder  
audio input terminals or microphone input terminals.  
Use the following procedure to perform series recording  
when this digital video recorder is connected to other  
digital video recorders.  
If series recording is set and normal recording area or  
alarm recording area remaining memory runs out,  
recording can be continued on a another digital video  
recorder. In doing so, recording to recording area with  
remaining memory is stopped.  
z An audio device cannot be connected from the audio  
output terminal on one digital video recorder to the  
audio input terminal on the next as for video. Connect  
devices to each recorder directly.  
Connect multiple digital video recorders and use series  
recording to record and save more video.  
4 Connecting alarm input and external  
timer input terminals.  
Connecting  
For recording using external alarms or external timers,  
connect a sensor or timer device to the digital video  
recorder.  
1 Connecting series connection  
terminals.  
Connect to the external device with a cable, and connect  
the first recorder to the second recorder with another  
cable. Connect the cable from the first recorder to the  
second recorder terminal and then from the second  
recorder connect the cable to the third recorder and so on.  
Connect the series output terminal of the first recorder to  
the series input terminal of the second recorder, and from  
the series output terminal of the second recorder to the  
series input terminal of the third recorder and so on, in the  
order that you want to record.  
To setup an overwriting series connection, connect the  
series output terminal of the last recorder to the series  
input terminal of the first.  
Settings  
1 Set “OVERWRITE” for “NORMAL  
RECORDING AREA” and “ALARM  
RECORDING AREA” to “OFF”.  
C
C
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>  
NORMAL RECORDING AREA  
OVERWRITE  
: OFF  
ALARM RECORDING AREA  
OVERWRITE  
: OFF  
REMAINING DISK WARNING  
SERIES REC  
: 1%  
: OFF  
: OFF  
AUTO DELETE  
z Use a connection cable less than 3 m in length.  
z For an overwriting series connection, when the last  
digital video recorder runs out of memory, the first takes  
over recording.  
2 Set “SERIES RECORDING” to “ON”.  
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>  
NORMAL RECORDING AREA  
OVERWRITE  
: OFF  
: OFF  
ALARM RECORDING AREA  
OVERWRITE  
2 Connecting VIDEO terminals.  
REMAINING DISK WARNING  
SERIES REC  
: 1%  
: ON  
: OFF  
Connect camera to the VIDEO IN terminal of the first  
recorder. Connect the VIDEO OUT terminal of the first  
recorder to the VIDEO IN terminal of the second recorder.  
Be sure to connect to the same channel. Connect to other  
digital video recorders in the following order using the  
VIDEO OUT terminal.  
AUTO DELETE  
English  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
3 Set depending on your recording needs.  
Starting and stopping series recording  
Type of recording  
Description  
1 Perform the following operation on the  
first recorder to start recording.  
1. Set image quality, audio recording,  
recording rate, and program recording  
with <NORMAL REC MODE SET>.  
2. When using program recording, use  
<PROGRAM REC SET> to set  
Normal recording  
Description  
Operation  
Using normal recording, or  
normal recording + alarm  
recording  
recording rate for each camera.  
Press the [REC/STOP] button  
1. Set date, start and end time, program  
recording, and recording rate with  
<TIMER SET> and turn the timer “ON”.  
2. Set image quality and audio recording  
with <NORMAL REC MODE SET>.  
3. When using program recording, use  
<PROGRAM REC SET> to set  
Using timer recording, or  
timer recording + alarm  
recording  
Press the [TIMER] button  
Timer recording  
2 When the normal recording area or  
alarm recording area memory level falls  
to the set percentage, recording is  
stopped and automatically resumes on  
the next connected recorder. Likewise,  
recording will resume on the next  
connected recorder and so on.  
recording rate for each camera.  
1. Set normal recording.  
Normal recording + 2. Set alarm recording with <ALARM REC  
Alarm recording  
MODE SET>. Set “ALARM  
RECORDING” to “ENABLED.”  
1. Set timer recording.  
Timer recording + 2. Set alarm recording with <ALARM REC  
Alarm recording  
MODE SET>. Set “ALARM  
RECORDING” to “AL-REC ON TIMER.”  
z Recording will stop if the following operations are  
performed on a DVR while recording.  
z Alarm recording cannot be recorded alone. Set to  
combine with normal recording or timer recording.  
z Normal recording and timer recording cannot be set  
simultaneously. If both are set, timer recording is  
enabled.  
Description  
Operation  
While normal recording, or  
normal recording + alarm  
recording  
Press and hold the [REC/STOP]  
button  
While timer recording, or  
timer recording + alarm  
recording  
Press the [TIMER] button  
4 After setting, press the [EXIT/OSD]  
button to save setting items.  
z Set the security lock to avoid stopping series recording  
due to one of the above operations.  
z If a recording is started by series recording, images  
saved to the normal recording area and alarm recording  
area are deleted. Backup important images before  
starting series recording.  
EXIT/OSD  
5 Use <COPY MENU SETTINGS> to copy  
setting items to all connected digital  
video recorders.  
70  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
\
Setting normal recording  
Setting auto deleting  
Use the following procedure to make normal recording  
settings for recording quality, audio recording, and  
recording rate. Alternatively, a program number set using  
“PROGRAM REC SET” can be specified to set these  
parameters.  
You can set a storage period for recorded data as  
described below. When the set period has expired, the  
corresponding data will be automatically deleted.  
1 Turn the jog dial to select “AUTO  
DELETE”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
1 Press the [MENU] button.  
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is  
displayed.  
“OFF” flashes.  
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>  
NORMAL RECORDING AREA  
MENU  
OVERWRITE  
: ON  
ALARM RECORDING AREA  
OVERWRITE  
: ON  
REMAINING DISK WARNING  
SERIES REC  
: **  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “2. RECORD  
SET”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
: OFF  
: OFF  
AUTO DELETE  
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.  
2 Turn the jog dial to select the storage  
period.  
You can set the storage period for recorded data “OFF” or  
within a range of “1 DAYS” - “99 DAYS” (full days).  
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>  
NORMAL RECORDING AREA  
3 Turn the jog dial to select “4. NORMAL  
REC MODE SET”, and then turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
OVERWRITE  
: ON  
ALARM RECORDING AREA  
OVERWRITE  
: ON  
REMAINING DISK WARNING  
SERIES REC  
: **  
The <NORMAL REC MODE SET> screen is displayed.  
: OFF  
AUTO DELETE  
: 10 DAYS  
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
: ENHANCED  
: OFF  
REC RATE  
:
15FPS ( 35H)  
: OFF  
REC PROGRAM GROUP  
3 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
4 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
EXIT/OSD  
4 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“ENHANCED” flashes (indicating enhanced quality  
recording).  
z When setting has been completed, all data with expried  
storage periods will be deleted. Before setting, copy  
important data to the archive area or CompactFlash  
card.  
z Data in the archive area cannot be auto deleted.  
English  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
5 Turn the jog dial to select “PICTURE  
QUALITY”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
7 Set “REC RATE”.  
(Default setting: 15 FPS)  
Example: 7.5  
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>  
Allowable recording time is dependent on the setting made  
for “PICTURE QUALITY”. For more details, see the “Table  
of recording rate and times” (JP.115).  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
: ENHANCED  
: OFF  
REC RATE  
:
15FPS ( 35H)  
: OFF  
REC PROGRAM GROUP  
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
: ENHANCED  
: ON  
Setting  
BASIC (BA)  
Description  
REC RATE  
: A 7.5FPS ( 66H)  
: OFF  
REC PROGRAM GROUP  
15 kB  
22 kB  
30 kB  
42 kB  
50 kB  
Allowable recording time  
NORMAL (NO)  
ENHANCED(EN)  
FINE (FI)  
SUPER FINE (SF)  
z When pre-alarm recording is set to “ON”, the recording  
rate is limited to 30 FPS (and a setting of 60 FPS  
cannot be made).  
z The file size is intended as a general guideline and  
8 Set “REC PROGRAM GROUP”.  
actual sizes will depend on the recorded video.  
See (JP.73) for more details regarding program  
recording.  
Example: P-1  
The following settings are carried out using the shuttle  
dial and jog dial.  
z Vertical cursor movement: Turn the jog dial.  
z Cursor movement to the right: Turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
z Modification of values: Turn the shuttle dial clockwise,  
and then with the setting value flashing, turn the jog  
dial.  
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
: ENHANCED  
: ON  
REC RATE  
:
****FPS ( 65H)  
REC PROGRAM GROUP  
: P-1  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
z Confirmation of values: Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
Setting  
OFF  
P-1  
Description  
Video from all cameras is recording at the same rate.  
Used when recording with Program No. 1.  
Used when recording with Program No. 2.  
Used when recording with Program No. 3.  
Used when recording with Program No. 4.  
6 Set “AUDIO RECORDING”.  
(Default setting: OFF)  
P-2  
Example: ON  
P-3  
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>  
P-4  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
: ENHANCED  
: ON  
REC RATE  
: A 15FPS ( 34H)  
9 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
REC PROGRAM GROUP  
: OFF  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
EXIT/OSD  
z Audio recording can only be specified when “REC  
RATE” is between A60 and A1 FPS.  
z When set to “ON”, the letter “A (indicating that audio will  
be recorded)” is displayed in front of the recording rate.  
As both video and audio will be stored in the normal  
recording area, this area’s overall capacity will reduce  
accordingly.  
z Audio will only be output during playback at the same  
rate as recording.  
z Audio and video may be slightly out of synchrony in  
certain situations.  
72  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “5. PROGRAM  
REC SET”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
Setting program recording  
Use the following procedure to record from specified  
cameras. A total of four programs (No. 1 through No. 4)  
can be setup for this purpose. For example, Program No. 1  
could be setup to record from cameras No. 1 through No. 4  
only, whereas Program No. 2 could be setup to record  
from cameras No. 3 through No. 6. In addition, these  
programs can also be used for timer recording.  
The <PROGRAM REC SET> screen is displayed with the  
cursor positioned on “PROGRAM”.  
<PROGRAM REC SET>  
PROGRAM : P-1  
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE(FPS)  
01: 0.5  
05: 0.5  
09: 0.5  
13: 0.5  
02: 0.5  
06: 0.5  
10: 0.5  
14: 0.5  
03: 0.5  
07: 0.5  
11: 0.5  
15: 0.5  
04: 0.5  
08: 0.5  
12: 0.5  
16: 0.5  
Example:  
Setting Program No. 1 to record video from cameras  
No. 1 through No. 3  
NORMAL REC : 65H  
Cameras No. 1 through No. 9 are available for the  
DSR-3709.  
3 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“P-1” flashes.  
<PROGRAM REC SET>  
PROGRAM : P-1  
(1)  
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE(FPS)  
(2)  
<PROGRAM REC SET>  
PROGRAM : P-1  
01: 0.5  
05: 0.5  
09: 0.5  
13: 0.5  
02: 0.5  
06: 0.5  
10: 0.5  
14: 0.5  
03: 0.5  
07: 0.5  
11: 0.5  
15: 0.5  
04: 0.5  
08: 0.5  
12: 0.5  
16: 0.5  
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE(FPS)  
NORMAL REC : 65H  
01: 0.5  
05: 0.5  
09: 0.5  
13: 0.5  
02: 0.5  
06: 0.5  
10: 0.5  
14: 0.5  
03: 0.5  
07: 0.5  
11: 0.5  
15: 0.5  
04: 0.5  
08: 0.5  
12: 0.5  
16: 0.5  
(1) PROGRAM  
NORMAL REC : 65H  
Selects Program No. 1 through Program No. 4.  
(2) SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE  
Sets which of the connected cameras to record from.  
Recording rates can also be set for each camera.  
4 Turn the jog dial to select a program  
number (P-1, for example), and then  
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
1 Press the [MENU] button, turn the jog  
dial to select “2. RECORD SET”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The cursor moves to “0.5” from “SELECT INDIVIDUAL  
CAMERA RATE (FPS)”.  
<PROGRAM REC SET>  
PROGRAM : P-1  
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.  
MENU  
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE(FPS)  
01: 0.5  
05: 0.5  
09: 0.5  
13: 0.5  
02: 0.5  
06: 0.5  
10: 0.5  
14: 0.5  
03: 0.5  
07: 0.5  
11: 0.5  
15: 0.5  
04: 0.5  
08: 0.5  
12: 0.5  
16: 0.5  
NORMAL REC : 65H  
5 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“0.5” (recording rate) flashes.  
<PROGRAM REC SET>  
PROGRAM : P-1  
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE(FPS)  
01: 0.5  
05: 05  
09: 0.5  
13: 0.5  
02: 0.5  
06: 0.5  
10: 0.5  
14: 0.5  
03: 0.5  
07: 0.5  
11: 0.5  
15: 0.5  
04: 0.5  
08: 0.5  
12: 0.5  
16: 0.5  
NORMAL REC : 65H  
English  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
6 Turn the jog dial to select a recording  
rate (7.5, for example), and then turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
Timer settings  
Use the following procedures to set recording start and  
stop times using the timer function.  
Camera No. 1 is now set to record at a rate of 7.5.  
The cursor moves to “02”.  
Timer setting items  
Valid recording rates  
Timer setting items allow you to set times at which to start  
and stop recording or recording rate on each specified day  
of the week.  
30*, 15, 7.5, 3.75, 1.875, 1, 0.5, 0.33, 0.25, 0.2, 0.1, 0.05,  
0.03, OFF (Unit: FPS)  
* A selection cannot be made when pre-alarm recording  
has been set to “ON”.  
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)  
<TIMER SET>  
WEEK  
SUN  
MON  
TUE  
WED  
THU  
FRI  
SAT  
DLY  
EXT  
START  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
*****  
STOP  
PROGRAM  
OFF  
FPS  
SET  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
7 Set recording rates for Camera No. 2  
and Camera No. 3 in the same way.  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
*****  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
8 With the cursor flashing on “04”  
(camera number), turn the jog dial to  
select “OFF”, and then turn the shuttle  
dial clockwise.  
OFF  
OFF  
(7)  
OFF  
OFF  
(1) WEEK  
Video from Camera No. 4 will not be recorded.  
These fields are used to select the days of the week for  
timer settings. When a day in the “WEEK” column is  
flashing, it can be set to another day.The 7th line (default:  
“SAT”) and 8th line (default: “DLY”) are used for timer  
recording settings of over 24 hours.  
9 Use the same procedure to set Camera  
No. 5 through Camera No. 16 to “OFF”.  
<PROGRAM REC SET>  
(2) START  
PROGRAM : P-1  
These fields are used to enter the time (24-hour time) at  
which to start timer recording.  
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE(FPS)  
01: 7.5  
05: OFF  
09: OFF  
13: OFF  
02: 1  
03: 1  
04: OFF  
08: OFF  
12: OFF  
16: OFF  
06: OFF  
10: OFF  
14: OFF  
07: OFF  
11: OFF  
15: OFF  
(3) STOP  
These fields are used to enter the time (24-hour time) at  
which to stop timer recording.  
NORMAL REC : 55H  
If the stop and end times are on different days (i.e.,  
midnight is included), a “T” will be displayed to the left of  
the end time.  
10If necessary, use this procedure to  
setup other programs (i.e., No. 2  
through No. 4).  
(4) PROGRAM  
These fields are used to enable timer recording using the  
program function “P-1” through “P-4”. (JP.73)  
11Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
(5) FPS  
These fields are used to set the recording rate.  
No setting is necessary here when using program  
recording.  
the normal screen.  
EXIT/OSD  
(6) SET  
When set to “ON”, timer is enabled.  
When set to “OFF”, timer is disabled.  
(7) Settings for timer recording of over 24 hours  
Use these lines for timer recording spanning more than 24  
hours.  
74  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
4 Turn the jog dial to set “SUN” to “DLY”,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
z The settings made using <NORMAL REC MODE SET>  
are used to set quality and audio recording for timer  
recording. (JP.71)  
The start time flashes as “--:--”.  
z Set recording rate to above 1 FPS when performing  
audio recording.  
z If the start and end times are on different days (i.e.,  
midnight is included), a “T” will be displayed to the left of  
the end time.  
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to set the  
remaining items with the shuttle dial,  
jog dial, or numeric keys.  
To change a displayed setting item  
Turn the shuttle dial in the required direction to select the  
item to be changed, and then turn the jog dial to change  
the setting.  
z Ensure that start and end times are input using 24-hour  
notation.  
Making timer reservations every day with the  
same duration and recording rate  
<TIMER SET>  
WEEK  
SUN  
MON  
TUE  
WED  
THU  
FRI  
SAT  
DLY  
EXT  
START  
08:30  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
*****  
STOP  
PROGRAM  
OFF  
FPS  
SET  
ON  
18:30  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
*****  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
Example:  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
Making a timer recording every day from 8:30 to 18:30  
with the same recording rate.  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
1 Press the [MENU] button and turn the  
jog dial to select “2. RECORD SET”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
OFF  
OFF  
6 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button when all of  
the necessary settings have been made.  
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.  
MENU  
The display returns to the normal screen.  
EXIT/OSD  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “6. TIMER  
SET”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
To set different recording times and/or  
recording rates for each day of the week  
Set the desired recording times and recording rate for  
each day.  
The <TIMER SET> screen is displayed.  
The cursor moves to the “SUN” row.  
<TIMER SET>  
WEEK  
SUN  
MON  
TUE  
WED  
THU  
FRI  
SAT  
DLY  
EXT  
START  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
*****  
STOP  
PROGRAM  
OFF  
FPS  
SET  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
z If specific days are set as holidays, the operation for  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
*****  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
Sunday will be used on those days also. (JP.56)  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
z If timer settings overlap, recording is performed in the  
following sequence.  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
Each daily reservation DLY EXT  
Priority (high) ←−−−−−−−−−−−−→ (low)  
z If a reservation for a particular day overlaps with a daily  
reservation, priority is given to that with the earliest start  
time. If both have the same start time, priority is given to  
that with the highest setting position in the menu.  
3 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“SUN” from the “WEEK” column flashes.  
SUN  
--:--  
--:--  
OFF 15FPS  
OFF  
English  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
2 Make settings in the “WEEK” and  
“START” columns.  
To cancel all set timer reservations  
1 Press the [MENU RESET] button with  
the <TIMER SET> screen displayed.  
(1) Turn the jog dial to change “SAT” to “MON”, and then  
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“--” (time) under “START” flashes.  
All setting items are cleared.  
MON  
--:--  
--:--  
OFF  
15FPS  
OFF  
(2) Set “--” to “10” with the jog dial or numeric keys and  
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
(3) Set “--” to “30” with the jog dial or numeric keys and  
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
[MENU RESET] button  
MON  
10:30  
--:--  
OFF  
15FPS  
OFF  
Timer reservations spanning more than 24  
hours  
3 Turn the jog dial to change the stop time  
from “--” to “**”, and then turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
Use the following procedures to set timer recordings  
spanning more than 24 hours. The 7th (SAT) and 8th  
(DLY) lines from the <TIMER SET> screen are used for  
this purpose.  
The “DLY” item on line 8 automatically changes to “TUE”  
(i.e., the day after that set on line 7) and flashes. Items that  
do not need to be set are displayed as  
.
MON  
TUE  
10:30  
**:**  
**:**  
--:--  
***  
OFF  
****FPS  
15FPS  
***  
OFF  
Example:  
Timer recording from 10:30 on Monday to 20:30 on  
Wednesday with a recording rate of 5 FPS.  
1 Turn the jog dial to select line 7 (SAT),  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
4 Set the day and time to stop recording  
using “WEEK” and “STOP”, and also  
make settings for “FPS” and “SET”.  
“SAT” from the “WEEK” column flashes.  
You can change the setting of the flashing item.  
MON  
WED  
10:30  
**:**  
**:**  
20:30  
***  
OFF  
****FPS  
5FPS  
***  
ON  
<TIMER SET>  
WEEK  
SUN  
MON  
TUE  
WED  
THU  
FRI  
SAT  
DLY  
EXT  
START  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
*****  
STOP  
PROGRAM  
OFF  
FPS  
SET  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
*****  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
OFF  
(2)  
(1)  
(3)  
(5)  
(4)  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
(1) Turn the jog dial to change “TUE” to “WED”, and then  
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
(2) Set “--” to “20” with the jog dial or numeric keys and  
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
OFF  
OFF  
Line 7  
OFF  
OFF  
(3) Set “--” to “30” with the jog dial or numeric keys and  
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
(4) Turn the jog dial to change “--” (recording rate) to “5”,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
(5) Turn the jog dial to set “OFF” to “ON”.  
5 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
EXIT/OSD  
76  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
5 Turn the jog dial to change “OFF” to  
“ON”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
Timer recording using an external timer  
Use the following procedure to control the start and end of  
recording in response to signals received via the EXT  
TIMER ON terminal on the rear of the digital video  
recorder.  
The cursor moves to line 1.  
EXT  
*****  
*****  
OFF  
5FPS  
ON  
Example:  
Recording at a rate of 5 FPS using the EXT TIMER ON  
terminal  
6 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting is completed and turns to normal screen.  
1 Connect the signal line from the  
external timer to the EXT TIMER ON  
terminal within the rear panel control  
terminal block.  
EXIT/OSD  
7 Press the [TIMER] button.  
External timer signal  
TIMER  
External timer input (with a pulse  
width of 1 second or more)  
z The [TIMER] button lights up and the recorder enters  
timer recording standby mode.  
z “REC” will be displayed within the operation display  
area while a signal is being received (with a pulse width  
of 1 second or more) via the EXT TIMER ON terminal,  
and monitoring video will be recorded in the normal  
recording area.  
2 Turn the jog dial to select line 9 (EXT),  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“OFF” for “PROGRAM” flashes.  
<TIMER SET>  
WEEK  
SUN  
MON  
TUE  
WED  
THU  
FRI  
SAT  
DLY  
EXT  
START  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
*****  
STOP  
PROGRAM  
OFF  
FPS  
SET  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
*****  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
OFF  
OFF  
z External timer recording and normal timer recording can  
be combined.  
z Connect the signal line from the external timer to the  
external timer recording terminal. External timer  
recording will not be possible until a timer is connected.  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
Setting alarm recording  
3 Turn the jog dial to set “PROGRAM” to  
“OFF”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
To set alarm recording  
Use the following procedure to select the recording picture  
quality, audio recording, and recording rate for the alarm  
recording area.  
“15” for “FPS” flashes.  
EXT  
*****  
*****  
OFF  
15FPS  
OFF  
1 Press the [MENU] button and turn the  
jog dial to select “2. RECORD SET”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
4 Turn the jog dial to set “FPS” to “5”,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.  
“OFF” flashes.  
MENU  
EXT  
*****  
*****  
OFF  
5FPS  
OFF  
English  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “7. ALARM  
REC MODE SET”, and then turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
5 Set “PICTURE QUALITY”.  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Setting  
BASIC (BA)  
Description  
The <ALARM REC MODE SET> screen is displayed.  
15 kB  
22 kB  
30 kB  
42 kB  
NORMAL (NO)  
ENHANCED(EN)  
FINE (FI)  
<ALARM REC MODE SET>  
The cursor moves to  
“ALARM  
RECORDING”.  
ALARM RECORDING  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
ALARM INTERLEAVE  
: OFF  
: ENHANCED  
: OFF  
: ONLY  
REC RATE:  
15FPS,  
DURATION: 20SEC  
: ***  
DURATION: ****  
SUPER FINE (SF) 50 kB  
PRE-ALARM RECORDING  
REC RATE: **** FPS,  
=> (01731 ALARMS CAN BE RECORDED)  
ALARM TRIGGER  
MOTION SENSOR  
: ALARM  
->  
z The file size is intended as a general guideline and  
actual sizes will depend on the recorded video.  
3 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
A guideline of the maximum number of alarm recordings  
under current settings is displayed in parentheses.  
“OFF” flashes.  
4 Turn the jog dial to select “ALARM  
RECORDING”, and then turn the shuttle  
dial clockwise.  
<ALARM REC MODE SET>  
ALARM RECORDING  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
ALARM INTERLEAVE  
: ENABLED  
: ENHANCED  
: OFF  
: ONLY  
<ALARM REC MODE SET>  
REC RATE:  
15FPS,  
DURATION: 20SEC  
: OFF  
DURATION: ****  
ALARM RECORDING  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
ALARM INTERLEAVE  
: ENABLED  
: ENHANCED  
: OFF  
PRE-ALARM RECORDING  
REC RATE: **** FPS,  
=> (01731 ALARMS CAN BE RECORDED)  
Maximum number of  
alarm recordings  
: ONLY  
ALARM TRIGGER  
MOTION SENSOR  
: ALARM  
->  
REC RATE:  
15FPS,  
DURATION: 20SEC  
: ***  
DURATION: ****  
PRE-ALARM RECORDING  
REC RATE: **** FPS,  
=> (01731 ALARMS CAN BE RECORDED)  
6 Set “AUDIO RECORDING”.  
ALARM TRIGGER  
MOTION SENSOR  
: ALARM  
->  
When set to “ON”, the letter “A” (indicating that audio will  
be recorded) and the maximum number of alarm  
recordings is displayed in parenthesis.  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Setting  
OFF  
Description  
Alarm recording is not carried out.  
<ALARM REC MODE SET>  
ALARM RECORDING  
: ENABLED  
: ENHANCED  
: ON  
Alarm recording is always carried out,  
regardless of whether or not timer recording  
is being performed.  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
ENABLED  
ALARM INTERLEAVE  
REC RATE: A 15FPS,  
PRE-ALARM RECORDING  
REC RATE: **** FPS,  
: ONLY  
DURATION: 20SEC  
: OFF  
DURATION: ****  
AL-REC ON  
TIMER  
Alarm recording is carried out only during  
timer recording.  
=> (01679 ALARMS CAN BE RECORDED)  
ALARM TRIGGER  
MOTION SENSOR  
: ALARM  
->  
AL-REC OFF  
TIMER  
Alarm recording is carried out only when  
timer recording is not being performed.  
Alarm recording is carried out only for the  
amount of time set by the timer. Timer  
recording is not performed.  
OLY AL-RC  
ON TMR  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Setting  
OFF  
Description  
Audio recording is not carried out.  
Audio recording is carried out.  
If “OLY AL-RC ON TMR” is set, timer recording becomes  
unavailable and the [TIMER] button is disabled.  
ON  
The following settings are carried out with the shuttle  
dial and jog dial.  
[Setting conditions]  
z Audio recording is possible when “REC RATE” is set to  
z Vertical cursor movement: Turn the jog dial.  
z Cursor movement to the right: Turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
1.00 FPS or greater.  
z Modification of values: Turn the shuttle dial clockwise,  
and then with the setting value flashing, turn the jog  
dial.  
z Confirmation of values: Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
78  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
7 Set “ALARM INTERLEAVE”.  
When alarm recording settings have been  
completed  
<ALARM REC MODE SET>  
ALARM RECORDING  
: ENABLED  
: ENHANCED  
: ON  
PICTURE QUALITY  
9 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
AUDIO RECORDING  
ALARM INTERLEAVE  
REC RATE: A 15FPS,  
PRE-ALARM RECORDING  
REC RATE: **** FPS,  
: ONLY  
DURATION: 20SEC  
: OFF  
DURATION: ****  
EXIT/OSD  
=> (01679 ALARMS CAN BE RECORDED)  
ALARM TRIGGER  
MOTION SENSOR  
: ALARM  
->  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
“ALARM” and the number of alarms appear in the  
operation display area.  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Setting  
Description  
When an alarm occurs, the alarm display flashes.  
Video is recorded only from cameras with an alarm  
occurring.  
ONLY  
Number of alarm  
Alarm display  
Recording is switched between camera video includ-  
ing an alarm and video from all connected cameras.  
SW  
01-01-04 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000  
* Recording pattern for “SW” and “ONLY”  
SW  
Alarm  
Alarm  
01 02 03 02 04 02 05 04 06 02 07 04 08 02  
Alternate recording of multiple items of alarm video  
02  
ONLY  
Alarm  
Alarm is cancelled  
01 02 03 02 02 02 02 02 04  
z If a new alarm occurs during alarm recording, the alarm  
count is incremented in the same way as if two alarms  
had occurred. However, in cases where alarms occur  
consecutively on the same channel, alarm retrigger  
settings (JP.84) can be used to ensure that these are  
counted as one alarm only.  
Recording until the alarm is cancelled  
8 Set “REC RATE” and “DURATION”.  
The maximum number of recording alarms (shown in  
parentheses) changes in accordance with the new  
settings.  
(Default setting for recording rate: 15 FPS)  
(Default setting for duration: 20 SEC)  
To set pre-alarm recording  
<ALARM REC MODE SET>  
z Settings cannot be made for “PRE-ALARM  
RECORDING” when “ALARM RECORDING” is set to  
“OFF”.  
ALARM RECORDING  
: ENABLED  
: ENHANCED  
: ON  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
ALARM INTERLEAVE  
REC RATE: A 15FPS,  
PRE-ALARM RECORDING  
REC RATE: **** FPS,  
: ONLY  
DURATION: 20SEC  
: OFF  
DURATION: ****  
1 Turn the jog dial to select “PRE-ALARM  
RECORDING”, and then turn the shuttle  
dial clockwise.  
=> (01679 ALARMS CAN BE RECORDED)  
Maximum number of  
alarm recording  
ALARM TRIGGER  
MOTION SENSOR  
: ALARM  
->  
“OFF” flashes.  
[Settings]  
Item  
Setting  
Description  
<ALARM REC MODE SET>  
ALARM RECORDING  
: ENABLED  
: ENHANCED  
: ON  
REC RATE 30 to 0.033 FPS  
Sets the recording rate.  
PICTURE QUALITY  
5 SEC, 10 SEC,  
20 SEC, 40 SEC,  
AUDIO RECORDING  
ALARM INTERLEAVE  
REC RATE: A 15FPS,  
PRE-ALARM RECORDING  
REC RATE: **** FPS,  
: ONLY  
DUATION: 20SEC  
: OFF  
DURATION: ****  
1 MIN, 2 MIN,  
3 MIN, 4 MIN,  
Sets the recording time per  
alarm.  
DURATION  
5 MIN, 10 MIN,  
15 MIN, CC*1  
=> (01679 ALARMS CAN BE RECORDED)  
ALARM TRIGGER  
MOTION SENSOR  
: ALARM  
->  
*1  
Operates while an alarm is being triggered. (5 sec.  
minimum)  
English  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
2 Turn the jog dial to change “OFF” to  
“ON”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
6 Turn the jog dial to set “DURATION” (10  
SEC for example), and then turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
A message appears indicating automatic rate adjustment.  
“NO” flashes.  
(Default setting: 1 MIN)  
The cursor moves to “ALARM TRIGGER”.  
<ALARM REC MODE SET>  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
ALARM RECORDING  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
ALARM INTERLEAVE  
REC RATE: A  
: ENABLED  
: ENHANCED  
: ON  
Setting  
OFF  
ON  
Description  
Pre-alarm recording is not carried out.  
Pre-alarm recording is carried out.  
: ONLY  
15FPS,  
DURATION: 20SEC  
: ON  
DURATION: 10SEC  
=> (00694 ALARMS CAN BE RECORDED)  
PRE-ALARM RECORDING  
REC RATE: A 30FPS,  
ALARM TRIGGER  
MOTION SENSOR  
: ALARM  
->  
3 Turn the jog dial to select “YES” for  
warning message, and then turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
When pre-alarm recording settings have been  
completed  
The cursor moves to recording rate and duration.  
<WARNING>  
7 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
REC RATE SETTING IN THE MENU WILL BE  
AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTED.  
EXIT/OSD  
ARE YOU SURE ?  
YES  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
CHANGE:JOG  
SET:SHUTTLE  
“PRE” appears in the operation display area. When an  
alarm occurs, “ALARM” is displayed.  
4 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“REC RATE” for “PRE-ALARM RECORDING” flashes.  
<ALARM REC MODE SET>  
Number of alarm  
PRE display  
01-01-04 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A PRE 0000  
ALARM RECORDING  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
ALARM INTERLEAVE  
REC RATE: A  
: ENABLED  
: ENHANCED  
: ON  
: ONLY  
15FPS,  
DURATION: 20SEC  
: ON  
DURATION: 1MIN  
=> (00229 ALARMCAN BE RECORDED)  
PRE-ALARM RECORDING  
REC RATE: A 15FPS,  
ALARM TRIGGER  
MOTION SENSOR  
: ALARM  
->  
02  
5 Turn the jog dial to set “REC RATE” (30  
FPS, for example), and then turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
z Pre-alarm recording is carried out over the period  
before alarm input as set by “DURATION”. In order to  
playback pre-alarm recordings, carry out alarm search  
(using the [SEARCH] button). (JP.31)  
(Default setting: 15 FPS)  
“DURATION” for “PRE-ALARM RECORDING” flashes.  
As playback begins at the point of alarm occurrence,  
use the shuttle dial to move back into the area of pre-  
alarm recording.  
<ALARM REC MODE SET>  
ALARM RECORDING  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
ALARM INTERLEAVE  
REC RATE: A  
: ENABLED  
: ENHANCED  
: ON  
: ONLY  
z When normal recording and pre-alarm recording are  
performed simultaneously, audio will not be recorded  
together with pre-alarm video.  
15FPS,  
DURATION: 20SEC  
: ON  
DURATION: 1MIN  
=> (00229 ALARMS CAN BE RECORDED)  
PRE-ALARM RECORDING  
REC RATE: A 30FPS,  
ALARM TRIGGER  
MOTION SENSOR  
: ALARM  
->  
80  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
Setting the alarm trigger  
Setting the motion sensors  
Use this setting to indicate how alarms are to be detected.  
Use the following procedure to set motion sensor on video  
from each camera so that alarms can be detected.  
1 Turn the jog dial to select “ALARM  
TRIGGER”, and then turn the shuttle  
dial clockwise.  
(1)  
“ALARM” flashes in the “ALARM TRIGGER” field.  
<ALARM REC MODE SET>  
ALARM RECORDING  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
ALARM INTERLEAVE  
REC RATE: A  
: ENABLED  
: ENHANCED  
: ON  
: ONLY  
CH01 T-1  
LEVEL : OFF  
MODE : A  
(2)  
15FPS,  
DURATION: 20SEC  
: ON  
DURATION: 1MIN  
=> (00229 ALARMS CAN BE RECORDED)  
PRE-ALARM RECORDING  
REC RATE: A 30FPS,  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
ALARM TRIGGER  
MOTION SENSOR  
: ALARM  
->  
(1) Motion sensor setting  
Displays changes in response to the sensor condition,  
and settings are made turning the jog dial.  
-: Sensor off  
2 Turn the jog dial to select an alarm  
detection method, and then turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
A or B: Sensor on  
(2) Camera number display  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Changes when a [CAMERA SELECT] button is  
pressed. Use this item to select the camera for which  
motion sensors are to be setup.  
Setting  
Description  
Alarm recording is performed when an  
external alarm is generated (i.e.,  
when a switch is attached to the alarm  
input terminal on the rear panel, and  
the switch is activated).  
(3) Time period  
ALARM  
Select an interval as set using “TIME PERIOD” on  
P.57.  
Alarm recording is performed when a  
motion sensor detects movement.  
See the section on setting motion  
sensors for more details.  
(4) LEVEL  
Sets the sensitivity level of the motion sensors.  
OFF: No motion sensor has been set.  
1 to 10: A motion sensor is set. Lower values  
correspond to higher sensitivity levels and vice versa.  
SENSOR  
Alarm recording is performed when  
both the external alarm and a motion  
sensor are activated simultaneously.  
ALARM AND  
SENSOR  
(5) MODE  
Sets the detection method for the motion sensors.  
(JP.83)  
Alarm recording is performed when  
ALARM OR SENSOR either the external alarm or a motion  
sensor is activated.  
z Refer to “NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS” for  
more details regarding operation of the jog dial and  
shuttle dial. (JP.9)  
[Setting conditions]  
z When sensor selection has been made (i.e.,  
“SENSOR”, “ALARM AND SENSOR”, or “ALARM OR  
SENSOR”) it will be necessary to set the motion  
sensors.  
z The digital video recorder supports the coaxial alarm  
signal from coaxial superimposition cameras. When a  
coaxial alarm is input, it is treated as an external alarm.  
English  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
1 Make timer settings for “TIME PERIOD  
A” and “TIME PERIOD B” from <TIME  
PERIOD SET>. (JP.57)  
7 Use this procedure to set other sensor  
positions.  
z All sensors on the same line as the cursor can be  
modified simultaneously by pressing the [MENU  
RESET] button. (A B -)  
2 Turn the jog dial select “MOTION  
SENSOR”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
The motion sensor screen is displayed.  
8 Turn the jog dial to move the cursor to  
“T-1”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
<ALARM REC MODE SET>  
ALARM RECORDING  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
ALARM INTERLEAVE  
REC RATE: A  
: ENABLED  
: ENHANCED  
: ON  
“T-1” flashes.  
: ONLY  
15FPS,  
DURATION: 20SEC  
: ON  
DURATION: 1MIN  
=> (00371 ALARMS CAN BE RECORDED)  
PRE-ALARM RECORDING  
REC RATE: A 15FPS,  
ALARM TRIGGER  
MOTION SENSOR  
: SENSOR  
->  
A
The cursor (blue) is  
displayed at the top left  
position.  
CH01 T-1  
LEVEL : OFF  
MODE : A  
9 Turn the jog dial to select T-1, T-2, T-3,  
or T-4, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
CH01 T-1  
LEVEL : OFF  
MODE : A  
The cursor moves to “LEVEL”.  
3 Press the [CAMERA SELECT] button.  
Select the camera for which motion sensors are to be  
10Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“OFF” flashes for “LEVEL”.  
setup.  
4 Turn the jog dial clockwise or counter-  
clockwise to move the cursor (blue) to  
the position where a sensor is to be set.  
A
5 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise, and  
then turn the jog dial to select “A” or  
“B”.  
CH01 T-2  
LEVEL : OFF  
MODE : A  
“A” or “B” : Sensor set  
“-”  
: No sensor  
A
CH01 T-1  
LEVEL : OFF  
MODE : A  
6 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
After confirming this setting, the cursor (blue) moves one  
position to the right.  
82  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
11Turn the jog dial to set the sensitivity  
(OFF or 1 through 10), and then turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
13Turn the jog dial to select a “MODE”,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The mode selection is confirmed and the cursor returns to  
the top left position.  
The cursor moves to “MODE”.  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Setting  
Description  
The motion sensor alarm is triggered when a  
moving object is detected in A.  
A  
A
The motion sensor alarm is triggered when a  
moving object is detected in B.  
B
CH01 T-2  
LEVEL : 1  
MODE : A  
The motion sensor alarm is triggered when a  
A AND B moving object is detected by a sensor in both A  
and B.  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Setting  
Description  
By setting A to important points (or suspected  
points of motion) and setting B to non-moving  
points, motion can be detected at point A even  
when the overall brightness changes and in other  
situations where motion at both A and B would  
normally be detected.  
OFF  
Motion sensing is not carried out.  
A AND NB  
Motion sensing is carried out. Lower values  
correspond to higher sensitivities.  
1 to10  
The motion sensor alarm is triggered when an  
object is detected moving from A to B. (within 2  
seconds from A to B)  
12Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“A” flashes for the “MODE”.  
A TO B  
B TO A  
The motion sensor alarm is triggered when an  
object is detected moving from B to A. (within 2  
seconds from B to A)  
A motion sensor alarm is triggered when the  
entire image changes uniformly. In this way,  
sprays and other similar measures can be  
protected against. (Setting of sensor positions is  
unnecessary.)  
A
C
CH01 T-2  
LEVEL : 1  
MODE : A  
14Set “LEVEL” and “MODE” for T-2  
through T-4 using the same procedure  
(i.e., steps 8 through 13).  
z Motion sensor positions are common for T-1 through  
T-4, and different settings cannot be made.  
z Sensitivity levels and modes can be set individually for  
T-1 through T-4.  
15Turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise.  
Motion sensor settings are confirmed and the <ALARM  
REC MODE SET> screen is displayed once again.  
To stop motion sensor recording  
(1) During recording, display the <ALARM REC MODE  
SET> screen and turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
(2) The motion sensor screen is displayed. Turn the  
sensitivity level OFF.  
English  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
4 Turn the jog dial to set the alarm trigger  
to “ON”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
z The period for “T-1” through “T-4” as set in step 9  
changes to that of “TIME PERIOD A” or “TIME PERIOD  
B” on P.57.  
z When time period is unset, T-1 settings are enabled  
and T-2 through T-4 are disabled.  
The cursor moves to “MAIN MON. DISPLAY”.  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Setting  
Description  
Even if a new alarm is received on the same channel  
during alarm recording, the duration is not extended.  
OFF  
z The sensitivity level can be checked using the setting  
screen. When motion is detected, the sensor color  
changes from green to red, and a buzzer is sounded.  
If detection is too sensitive, an alarm can be triggered  
even by slight changes in lighting; accordingly, the  
sensitivity level should be set to match the camera  
location.  
If a new alarm is received on the same channel during  
alarm recording, the duration is extended and both  
alarms are treated as one. (Example: Input in the alarm  
sequence A  
C) However, if the new alarm is on a  
different channel, the alarms are treated separately.  
(Example: Input in the alarm sequence A  
Example:  
B
C)  
ON  
Alarm  
Alarm  
Setting alarm operation and display  
Alarm Recording A Alarm Recording C  
CH1  
CH2  
1 Press the [MENU] button and turn the  
jog dial to select “2. RECORD SET”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial.  
Alarm  
Alarm Recording B  
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.  
MENU  
Setting alarm display  
1 Turn the jog dial to select “MAIN MON.  
DISPLAY”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “8. ALARM  
OPERATION SET”, and then turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
“NC” starts to flash for “MAIN MON. DISPLAY”.  
<ALARM OPERATION SET>  
ALARM RETRIGGER  
: ON  
The <ALARM OPERATION SET> screen is displayed with  
the cursor positioned on “ALARM RETRIGGER”.  
MAIN MON. DISPLAY  
ALARM PRIORITY  
MON.2 DISPLAY  
: NC  
: LAST  
: OFF  
<ALARM OPERATION SET>  
ALARM RETRIGGER  
: OFF  
MAIN MON. DISPLAY  
ALARM PRIORITY  
MON.2 DISPLAY  
: NC  
: LAST  
: OFF  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Setting  
Description  
When an alarm is detected, the video on the  
channel containing the alarm is displayed in full  
screen format on the main monitor.  
FULL  
3 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“OFF” flashes in the “ALARM RETRIGGER” field.  
When an alarm is detected, a multi-9 screen  
display is presented on the main monitor.  
9
When an alarm is detected, a multi-16 screen  
display is presented on the main monitor. (This can  
only be set on the DSR-3716.)  
16  
The main monitor’s display does not change when  
an alarm is detected.  
NC  
84  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
RECORD SET  
2 Turn the jog dial to set “MAIN MON.  
DISPLAY”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
Canceling alarms  
To forcibly cancel an alarm during alarm operation, press  
the [CAMERA SELECT] button for the camera inputting  
the alarm and hold it for approximately 3 seconds.  
Alternatively, connect a switch between the alarm reset  
terminal and C (the grounded terminal), and turn on the  
switch to cancel any alarm that is occurring.  
The cursor moves to “ALARM PRIORITY”.  
3 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and turn  
the jog dial to set “ALARM PRIORITY”,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise  
once again.  
ALARM  
RESET  
C
The cursor moves to “MON.2 DISPLAY”.  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Setting  
Description  
When a number of alarms are occurring, the most-  
recent alarm video is given priority.  
LAST  
When a number of alarms are occurring, only the  
video for the first alarm is displayed. However, if  
the duration for the alarm with the first input  
expires, video for the next alarm will be displayed.  
FIRST  
When a number of alarms are occurring, the  
display switches between the video from the  
corresponding cameras, showing each for one  
second.  
SWITCH  
z After an alarm duration has ended, the display returns  
to the screen prior to alarm input.  
4 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and turn  
the jog dial to set “MON.2 DISPLAY”  
(ON/OFF), and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
The cursor moves to “ALARM RETRIGGER”.  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Setting  
Description  
When an alarm occurs, the corresponding video is  
displayed on the monitor 2.  
ON  
OFF  
No alarm video is displayed on the monitor 2.  
5 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
EXIT/OSD  
English  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 GENERAL SET  
[EXIT/OSD] button  
Shuttle dial  
Main menu  
[MENU] button  
<MAIN MENU>  
1.INITIAL SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
2.RECORD SET  
3.GENERAL SET  
4.SCREEN SET  
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME  
6.INITIALIZATION LOG  
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS  
Jog dial  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
Setting  
Description  
Ref.  
General settings  
<RS-485 SET>  
DATA SPEED  
STATUS INFO  
ALARM INFO  
ADDRESS  
:
:
:
:
19200  
ON  
The <GENERAL SET> is used to make the following  
settings.  
<RS-485 SET>  
Lets you make settings when P.96  
using RS-485.  
ON  
6
000  
<GENERAL SET>  
1.DISPLAY SET  
2.BUZZER SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
3.SECURITY LOCK SET  
4.HDD SET  
<CAMERA CONTROL SET>  
CH PROTOCOL  
ADD.  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CH PROTOCOL  
09 OFF  
10 OFF  
11 OFF  
12 OFF  
13 OFF  
14 OFF  
15 OFF  
16 OFF  
ADD.  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
<CAMERA CONTROL SET>  
01 OFF  
02 OFF  
03 OFF  
04 OFF  
05 OFF  
06 OFF  
07 OFF  
08 OFF  
5.NETWORK SET  
6.RS-485 SET  
Set when cameras with  
remote operation capability  
7
P.97  
7.CAMERA CONTROL SET  
are connected.  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
Setting  
Description  
<DISPLAY SET>  
Ref.  
Setting data display  
<DISPLAY SET>  
Switches display items such  
as date and time from the  
operation display area.  
Settings can also be made  
for situations where video  
signals are lost.  
DATE  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
Use the following procedure to remove the date, time, or  
other information from the operation display area. All items  
are set to “ON” by default. Where necessary, the required  
items can be turned off.  
TIME  
QUALITY  
AUDIO  
1
2
3
4
5
ALARM COUNT  
ALARM TYPE  
TITLE  
P.86  
VIDEO LOSS  
:
ON  
1 Press the [MENU] button and turn the  
jog dial to select “3. GENERAL SET”,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
<BUZZER SET>  
ALARM  
:
OFF  
ON  
DISK FULL  
DISK ERROR  
LOCK WARNING  
KEY IN  
:
:
:
:
:
ON  
<BUZZER SET>  
Turns the buzzer on or off.  
ON  
P.88  
P.89  
P.92  
P.93  
OFF  
OFF  
NON REC  
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.  
MENU  
<SECURITY LOCK SET>  
PASSWORD(4-8) USE  
<SECURITY LOCK SET>  
Lets you set passwords to  
prevent unauthorized users  
from operating the digital  
video recorder.  
LEVEL  
ADMIN  
--------  
--------  
:
OFF  
OFF  
USER  
REC CONTROL  
ADMIN  
ADMIN  
CAMERA CONTROL  
:
<HDD SET>  
<HDD SET>  
DISK1  
:
82GB  
---GB  
->  
Allows confirmation of hard  
disk capacity and performs  
initialization.  
Settings can also be made  
for mirroring.  
DISK2  
:
DISK INITIALIZE  
CAUTION  
:
ALL RECORDING WILL BE ERASED!  
MIRRORING  
:
:
OFF  
***  
PLAYBACK DRIVE  
CAUTION  
:
RECORDING SPEED WILL BE  
LIMITED BY MIRRORING!  
<NETWORK SET>  
NETWORK CONTROL  
NETWORK STATUS  
IP ADDRESS  
SUBNET MASK  
GATEWAY  
PORT  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
<NETWORK SET>  
ON  
192.168. 0.  
255.255.255.  
0. 0. 0.  
00080  
1
0
0
Allows the digital video  
recorder to be connected to a  
PC via a network.  
ID  
PASSWORD (4-8)  
1111----  
ID1  
ID2  
2222----  
ID3  
3333----  
86  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
GENERAL SET  
The content of the operation display area  
changes when the setting for “ALARM  
RECORDING” (JP.77) from <ALARM REC  
MODE SET> is switched.  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “1. DISPLAY  
SET”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
The <DISPLAY SET> screen is displayed.  
When turned “OFF”:  
The alarm count and type are not displayed.  
When turned “ENABLED”:  
The operation display area changes as follows.  
z “ALARM” is displayed when alarm video is recorded or  
played back.  
<DISPLAY SET>  
(1)  
DATE  
: ON  
: ON  
: ON  
: ON  
: ON  
: ON  
: ON  
(2)  
(4)  
(6)  
TIME  
(3)  
(5)  
(7)  
QUALITY  
AUDIO  
ALARM COUNT  
ALARM TYPE  
TITLE  
z “PRE” is displayed when pre-alarm video is recorded or  
played back.  
VIDEO LOSS  
: ON  
z
“ARCHIV” is displayed for playback from the archive area.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
6 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
01-01-04 00:00:00 REC 1%  
02  
EN A ALARM 0000  
the normal screen.  
EXIT/OSD  
(7)  
3 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“ON” for the (1) “DATE” flashes. This can be set to “OFF”  
turning the jog dial to remove the date from the operation  
display area.  
z A maximum of 9,999 alarms can be displayed in the  
operation display area. When this number is exceeded,  
the count returns to 0000.  
4 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
\
The cursor moves to the time entry.  
The following settings are carried out with the shuttle  
dial and jog dial.  
z Vertical cursor movement: Turn the jog dial.  
z Cursor movement to the right: Turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
z Modification of values: Turn the shuttle dial clockwise,  
and then with the setting value flashing, turn the jog  
dial.  
Setting display for video loss  
Use the following procedure to display “VIDEO LOSS!”  
when the camera video is interrupted.  
1 Turn the jog dial to select “VIDEO  
LOSS”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
z Confirmation of values: Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
<DISPLAY SET>  
DATE  
: ON  
: ON  
: ON  
: ON  
: ON  
: ON  
: ON  
TIME  
5 Perform the following if so required.  
z TIME (OFF):  
QUALITY  
AUDIO  
ALARM COUNT  
ALARM TYPE  
TITLE  
Time is not displayed during recording or playback.  
z QUALITY (OFF):  
VIDEO LOSS  
: ON  
Picture quality mode is not displayed during recording  
or playback.  
z AUDIO (OFF):  
2 Turn the jog dial to display “ON”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
Audio recording settings are not displayed during  
recording or playback.  
z ALARM COUNT (OFF):  
The current number of alarms is not displayed.  
z ALARM TYPE (OFF):  
The type of alarm recording is not displayed.  
z TITLE (OFF):  
3 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
EXIT/OSD  
Camera titles are not displayed.  
English  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
GENERAL SET  
3 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“OFF” flashes for “ALARM”.  
z After “VIDEO LOSS” is detected, it can be cancelled by  
performing either of the following.  
(1) Input a video signal.  
4 Turn the jog dial to display “ON”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
(2) If no video input is required, use a [CAMERA SELECT]  
button to select the camera for which video loss was  
detected and then press and hold the same button.  
<BUZZER SET>  
ALARM  
: ON  
: ON  
: ON  
: ON  
: OFF  
: OFF  
DISK FULL  
DISK ERROR  
LOCK WARNING  
KEY IN  
Setting the buzzer  
NON REC  
Use the following procedure to set a warning buzzer to  
sound for alarms or when hard disk space becomes  
insufficient.  
1 Press the [MENU] button, turn the jog  
dial to select “3. GENERAL SET”, and  
then turn shuttle dial clockwise.  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Setting  
OFF  
ON  
Description  
The buzzer is not sounded when an alarm is  
generated.  
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.  
MENU  
The buzzer is sounded when an alarm is generated.  
Use the above procedure whenever necessary to  
change buzzer settings (ON or OFF).  
5 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “2. BUZZER  
SET”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
the normal screen.  
EXIT/OSD  
The <BUZZER SET> screen is displayed.  
(1)  
<BUZZER SET>  
ALARM  
: OFF  
: ON  
(2)  
(3)  
DISK FULL  
DISK ERROR  
LOCK WARNING  
KEY IN  
: ON  
: ON  
z To stop a buzzer, press any button or turn either the jog  
: OFF  
: OFF  
dial or shuttle dial.  
NON REC  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
(1) ALARM (default setting: OFF)  
Sounds the buzzer when a alarm occurs.  
(2) DISK FULL (default setting: ON)  
Sounds the buzzer when overwriting is forbidden and  
the hard disk capacity becomes insufficient.  
(3) DISK ERROR (default setting: ON)  
Sounds a buzzer when a hard-disk error occurs.  
(4) LOCK WARNING (default setting: ON)  
Sounds a buzzer if a button is pressed while the  
security lock is on. Specifically, the buzzer sounds  
twice with an interval of approximately 0.5 seconds.  
(5) KEY IN (default setting: OFF)  
Sounds the buzzer when a button is pressed.  
(6) NON REC (default setting: OFF)  
A buzzer is sounded upon loss of recording.  
88  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
GENERAL SET  
Setting the security lock  
Use the procedures described below to set a passwords and to prevent unauthorized users from operating the digital video  
recorder. If a button is pressed while the security lock is in operation, a buzzer will be sounded. Be sure to make a note of the  
passwords that are set.  
Operation after setting passwords  
Two password types can be set, one for administrators and one for users. The table below gives typical password setting  
combinations and lists how the digital video recorder operates for each.  
ADMIN  
USER  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
Setting  
item  
REC  
CONTROL  
ADMIN  
ADMIN  
USER  
USER  
ADMIN  
ADMIN  
ADMIN  
USER  
USER  
USER  
USER  
CAMERA  
CONTROL  
ADMIN  
USER  
USER  
USER  
USER  
USER  
USER  
USER  
ADMIN  
password  
not entered not entered not entered not entered  
LIVE  
PLAY  
PTZ  
Opera-  
tion  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
REC  
-
-
-
-
MENU  
-
-
Operation are as follows.  
Setting the administrator password  
LIVE: [CAMERA SELECT], [QUAD], [MULTI], [MON2],  
[EXIT/OSD], [SEQUENCE] button operations  
PLAY: [PLAY/STOP], [ZOOM], [SEARCH], [COPY],  
[STILL], [SHUTTLE HOLD], [ALARM] button  
operations, jog/shuttle dial operations  
Passwords comprise between 4 and 8 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Characters that can be entered in passwords: 0 to 9, A to Z  
Example: Setting “123456AB” as a password  
PTZ:  
PTZ camera controls operations  
REC: [REC/STOP], [TIMER] button operations  
MENU: [MENU], [MENU RESET] button operations  
1 Press the [MENU] button and turn the  
jog dial to select “3. GENERAL SET”,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.  
z Enter the administrator password to enable all  
operations.  
MENU  
z If administrator and user are both “OFF”, all operations  
are enabled no matter the security lock. (Default setting  
value)  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “3. SECURITY  
LOCK SET”, and then turn the shuttle  
dial clockwise.  
The <SECURITY LOCK SET> screen is displayed.  
The cursor moves to “ADMIN”.  
<SECURITY LOCK SET>  
LEVEL  
PASSWORD(4-8) USE  
ADMIN  
--------  
--------  
OFF  
OFF  
USER  
REC CONTROL  
CAMERA CONTROL  
: ADMIN  
: ADMIN  
English  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
GENERAL SET  
3 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The first password character “-” flashes.  
Setting the user password  
Example: Setting “AB123456”  
ADMIN  
--------  
OFF  
1 Turn the jog dial to move the cursor to  
“USER”.  
<SECURITY LOCK SET>  
4 Set a character (0 to 9, A to Z) with the  
jog dial or numeric keys.  
LEVEL  
PASSWORD(4-8) USE  
ADMIN  
123456AB  
--------  
ON  
USER  
OFF  
REC CONTROL  
CAMERA CONTROL  
: ADMIN  
: ADMIN  
Example:  
Display “1” with the jog dial or numeric keys.  
ADMIN  
1-------  
OFF  
2 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The first password entry bar “-” flashes.  
Turn the jog dial to display “A”.  
5 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The second password character “-” flashes.  
USER  
A-------  
OFF  
6 Use the same procedure to set  
“123456AB”.  
3 Turn the jog dial clockwise.  
The second password entry bar “-” flashes.  
Turn the jog dial to display “B”.  
z To set a 4-digit password  
Use the same procedure as for the administrator  
password to set “123456”.  
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise when “-” for the fifth  
character is flashing.  
7 Following this, turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
4 Following this, turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
The cursor moves to “OFF” (flashing).  
The cursor moves to “OFF” (flashing).  
<SECURITY LOCK SET>  
<SECURITY LOCK SET>  
LEVEL  
PASSWORD(4-8) USE  
LEVEL  
PASSWORD(4-8) USE  
ADMIN  
123456AB  
AB123456  
ON  
ADMIN  
123456AB  
--------  
OFF  
OF  
USER  
OFF  
USER  
REC CONTROL  
CAMERA CONTROL  
: ADMN  
: ADMIN  
REC CONTROL  
CAMERA CONTROL  
: ADMIN  
: ADMIN  
5 Turn the jog dial to select “ON”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
8 Turn the jog dial to select “ON”.  
The cursor moves to “REC CONTROL”.  
z If you select “OFF” for the “ADMIN” setting, you cannot  
<SECURITY LOCK SET>  
set the “USER” password.  
LEVEL  
PASSWORD(4-8) USE  
ADMIN  
123456AB  
AB123456  
ON  
ON  
USER  
9 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
REC CONTROL  
CAMERA CONTROL  
: ADMIN  
: ADMIN  
The cursor moves to “USER”.  
If you do not want to set a user password, the  
password setting procedure can now be ended.  
Turn the jog dial to move the cursor to “REC  
CONTROL” so that authorization for recording and  
playback operations may be set.  
90  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
GENERAL SET  
Recording control settings  
Setting the security lock  
LOCK indicator [MENU] button  
[EXIT/OSD] button  
1 Turn the jog dial to move cursor to  
“REC CONTROL”.  
<SECURITY LOCK SET>  
LEVEL  
PASSWORD(4-8) USE  
ADMIN  
123456AB  
AB123456  
ON  
ON  
USER  
REC CONTROL  
CAMERA CONTROL  
: ADMIN  
: ADMIN  
2 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
[SHUTTLE HOLD] button  
Turn the jog dial to select either “ADMIN” or “USER”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The cursor moves to “CAMERA CONTROL.”  
1 With the normal monitoring screen  
displayed, press the [SHUTTLE HOLD]  
button for approximately 3 seconds.  
<SECURITY LOCK SET>  
LEVEL  
PASSWORD(4-8) USE  
The LOCK indicator on the front panel lights up and a  
buzzer sounds to indicate activation of the security lock.  
ADMIN  
123456AB  
AB123456  
ON  
ON  
USER  
REC CONTROL  
CAMERA CONTROL  
: ADMIN  
: ADMIN  
SHUTTLE HOLD  
2 To confirm activation of this function,  
press the [MENU] button.  
Camera control settings  
1 Turn the jog dial to move cursor to  
“CAMERA CONTROL”.  
A password entry screen appears for about 5 seconds.  
<SECURITY LOCK SET>  
LEVEL  
PASSWORD(4-8) USE  
SECURITY LOCKED !  
PLEASE ENTER YOUR PASSWORD  
________  
ADMIN  
123456AB  
AB123456  
ON  
ON  
USER  
REC CONTROL  
CAMERA CONTROL  
: ADMIN  
: ADMIN  
CHANGE:JOG  
SET:SHUTTLE  
2 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
Canceling the security lock  
Turn the jog dial to select either “ADMIN” or “USER”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
This completes the setting procedure.  
3 Enter your password while the  
password entry screen is displayed.  
Use the jog dial and the shuttle dial to perform this  
procedure.  
3 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
EXIT/OSD  
z Enter the password set for administrators or users  
(such as “123456AB”).  
Be sure to enter the correct password for the operation  
(s) to be carried out. (JP.89)  
4 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The security lock is cancelled and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
English  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
GENERAL SET  
4 Turn the jog dial to select “YES”.  
5 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The “HDD INITIALIZING!” screen is displayed, and the  
hard disk is initialized.  
z If an administrator password was entered, the security  
lock is cancelled and the indicator is turned off.  
z If a user password was entered, the security lock is  
partially cancelled and the indicator remains lit.  
When initialization has been completed, the display  
returns to the <HDD SET> screen.  
Setting and initializing the hard disk  
This section describes how to initialize and expand the  
hard disk.  
When a single hard disk is installed, the hard disk capacity  
is displayed for DISK 1; when two hard disks are installed,  
the capacity is displayed for “DISK 1” and “DISK 2”.  
HDD INITIALIZING !  
Initializing the hard disk  
1 Press the [MENU] button and turn the  
jog dial to select “3. GENERAL SET”,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
6 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.  
EXIT/OSD  
MENU  
z Initialization of hard disk erases all contents.  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “4. HDD SET”,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The <HDD SET> screen is displayed.  
The cursor moves to “DISK INITIALIZE”.  
<HDD SET>  
DISK1  
:
:
82GB  
---GB  
->  
DISK2  
DISK INITIALIZE  
CAUTION : ALL RECORDING WILL BE ERASED!  
MIRRORING  
:
:
OFF  
***  
PLAYBACK DRIVE  
CAUTION : RECORDING SPEED WILL BE  
LIMITED BY MIRRORING!  
3 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
<WARNING> screen is displayed. “NO” flashes.  
<WARNING>  
THIS CHANGE WILL INITIALIZE THE DISK.  
ALL RECORDING WILL BE ERASED.  
ARE YOU SURE ?  
NO  
CHANGE:JOG  
SET:SHUTTLE  
92  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
GENERAL SET  
Expanding the hard disk capacity  
Network settings  
Please contact your local store or service center regarding  
hard disk expansion. A separately sold hard disk provided  
by Sanyo will be required in order to perform this  
procedure.  
Use the following procedure to make digital video recorder  
menu settings and to monitor video from a PC via a  
network (LAN).  
A LAN cable must be connected to the LAN terminal on  
the rear panel before proceeding.  
[Setting conditions]  
z Initialization must always be carried out after hard disk  
expansion.  
z When connecting the digital video recorder to a  
network, contact the network administrator in charge.  
The <HDD SET> screen  
z MIRRORING: When hard disk expansion has been  
carried out, the same video can be recorded to both  
hard disks. Accordingly, if a problem occurs with  
recording to one of the hard disks, the <HDD SET>  
screen can be used to select the other hard disk for  
provision of readable data. When mirroring has been  
set, the recording rate is controlled automatically (i.e.,  
set to half of the normal value) and the appropriate care  
must be taken.  
Making network connections  
z Connecting to a PC directly  
(without using a switch)  
1-16  
Main Monitor  
1
3
2
4
z PLAYBACK DRIVE: This parameter is used together  
with “MIRRORING” and it indicates which of the two  
hard disks is to be used to provide recordings for  
playback.  
Monitor  
(sold separately)  
PC  
A cross-type LAN cable must  
be used here.  
z If a playback problem occurs while mirroring is turned  
on, change the hard disk used for playback.  
(10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX  
Category 5)  
z Connecting to an intranet  
(using a switch)  
1-16  
z If hard disk expansion has been carried out,  
initialization is performed for both hard disks  
simultaneously, and all data will be lost.  
z All important recordings should be copied to  
CompactFlash cards or another storage medium before  
hard disk expansion.  
z If a hard disk not provided by Sanyo is used, Sanyo  
cannot be responsible for failures in performance or  
operation.  
Main Monitor  
1
3
2
4
ALL  
RESET  
Monitor  
(sold  
separately)  
Switch  
PC  
A straight-type LAN cable  
must be used here.  
(10 BASE-T/100 BASE-  
TX Category 5)  
Intranet  
Switch  
PC  
English  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
GENERAL SET  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Making network settings  
Item  
Setting  
Description  
The digital video recorder  
cannot be controlled via a  
network.  
1 Press the [MENU] button and turn the  
jog dial to select “3. GENERAL SET”,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
OFF  
ON (NETWORK) Priority is given to operations  
ID: 1, 2, 3  
on the PC. When playback is  
being performed on the PC,  
live video is displayed on the  
monitor connected to the  
digital video recorder.  
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.  
Connection  
condition on  
DVR:  
Connection  
possible when  
not performing  
playback (incl.  
during copy),  
MENU  
Furthermore, when  
connected to a PC, only  
operations for the switching  
of monitor display will be  
NETWORK  
CONTROL  
menu display, or possible using the digital  
camera controls. video recorder.  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “5. NETWORK  
SET”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
ON (DVR)  
ID: 1  
Connection  
Priority is given to operations  
condition on  
The <NETWORK SET> screen is displayed.  
on the digital video recorder.  
DVR:  
Even if connected to a PC,  
Connection  
recorder operations are  
possible when  
<NETWORK SET>  
given priority.  
NETWORK CONTROL  
NETWORK STATUS  
IP ADDRESS  
SUBNET MASK  
GATEWAY  
PORT  
: OFF  
not performing  
playback (incl.  
during copy).  
: ON  
: 192.168. 0.  
: 255.255.255.  
1
0
0
:
0. 0. 0.  
During network connection,  
the message “NETWORK  
CONTROL” is displayed on  
the digital video recorder’s  
monitor.  
: 00080  
ID  
: PASSWORD (4-8)  
: 1111----  
ON  
ID1  
ID2  
: 2222----  
NETWORK  
STATUS  
ID3  
: 3333----  
The message “NETWORK  
CONTROL” is not displayed  
on the digital video  
recorder’s monitor, even  
during network connection.  
3 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
OFF  
”OFF” flashes for “NETWORK CONTROL”.  
4 Turn the jog dial to set to “ON  
(NETWORK)” or “ON (DVR)”, and then  
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
z Network control is only possible when “NETWORK  
CONTROL” has been set to “ON”.  
The cursor moves to “NETWORK STATUS”.  
z In order to prevent network control while the digital  
video recorder is connected to a network, set  
“NETWORK CONTROL” to “OFF”.  
<NETWORK SET>  
NETWORK CONTROL  
NETWORK STATUS  
IP ADDRESS  
SUBNET MASK  
GATEWAY  
PORT  
: ON(NETWORK)  
: ON  
: 192.168. 0.  
: 255.255.255.  
1
0
0
The following settings are carried out with the shuttle  
dial, jog dial, or numeric keys.  
:
0. 0. 0.  
: 00080  
ID  
: PASSWORD (4-8)  
: 1111----  
z Vertical cursor movement: Turn the jog dial.  
z Cursor movement to the right: Turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
ID1  
ID2  
: 2222----  
ID3  
: 3333----  
z Modification of values : Turn the shuttle dial clockwise  
and when the setting value is flashing, modify the value  
with the jog dial or numeric keys.  
5 Turn the jog dial to select “ON” or  
“OFF”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
z Confirmation of values : Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The cursor moves to “IP ADDRESS”.  
<NETWORK SET>  
NETWORK CONTROL  
NETWORK STATUS  
IP ADDRESS  
SUBNET MASK  
GATEWAY  
PORT  
: ON(NETWORK)  
: ON  
: 192.168. 0.  
: 255.255.255.  
1
0
0
:
0. 0. 0.  
: 00080  
ID  
: PASSWORD (4-8)  
: 1111----  
ID1  
ID2  
: 2222----  
ID3  
: 3333----  
94  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
GENERAL SET  
6 Set “IP ADDRESS”.  
Setting passwords for the network  
(Default setting: 192. 168. 0. 1)  
Three access levels are setup for network connection, and  
a password is set for each. Passwords comprise between  
4 and 8 alphanumeric characters.  
<NETWORK SET>  
NETWORK CONTROL : ON(NETWORK)  
NETWORK STATUS  
IP ADDRESS  
SUBNET MASK  
GATEWAY  
: ON  
: 192.168. 0.  
: 255.255.255.  
1
0
0
:
0. 0. 0.  
PORT  
: 00080  
z
“ID” or “PASSWORD (4-8)” at the top of the screen is  
the screen title. You cannot move the cursor to this item.  
7 Set “SUBNET MASK”.  
(Default setting: 255. 255. 255. 0)  
Example:  
Setting “AB123456” to “ID1”  
<NETWORK SET>  
NETWORK CONTROL  
: ON(NETWORK)  
: ON  
1 Turn the jog dial to select “ID 1”.  
NETWORK STATUS  
IP ADDRESS  
SUBNET MASK  
GATEWAY  
: 192.168. 0.  
: 255.255.255.  
1
0
0
<NETWORK SET>  
NETWORK CONTROL  
NETWORK STATUS  
IP ADDRESS  
SUBNET MASK  
GATEWAY  
PORT  
: ON(NETWORK)  
:
0. 0. 0.  
: ON  
PORT  
: 00080  
: 192.168. 0.  
: 255.255.255.  
1
0
0
:
0. 0. 0.  
8 Set “GATEWAY”.  
(Default setting: 0. 0. 0. 0)  
: 00080  
ID  
: PASSWORD (4-8)  
: 1111----  
ID1  
ID2  
: 2222----  
ID3  
: 3333----  
<NETWORK SET>  
NETWORK CONTROL  
NETWORK STATUS  
IP ADDRESS  
SUBNET MASK  
GATEWAY  
: ON(NETWORK)  
: ON  
[Settings]  
Setting  
: 192.168. 0.  
: 255.255.255.  
1
0
0
Description  
Default setting  
1111----  
:
0. 0. 0.  
Allows video to be monitored via  
the network.  
PORT  
: 00080  
ID1  
Allows video to be monitored and  
the playback or search/playback of 2222----  
recordings via the network.  
9 Set “PORT”.  
ID2  
(Default setting: 00080)  
Allows all of this recorder’s  
ID3  
operations and settings to be  
performed.  
3333----  
<NETWORK SET>  
NETWORK CONTROL  
NETWORK STATUS  
IP ADDRESS  
SUBNET MASK  
GATEWAY  
: ON(NETWORK)  
: ON  
: 192.168. 0.  
: 255.255.255.  
1
0
0
2 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
:
0. 0. 0.  
The first password entry item “1” flashes.  
PORT  
: 00080  
Characters that can be entered in passwords: 0 to 9, A to Z  
3 Enter the password with the shuttle dial,  
jog dial, or numeric keys.  
(1) Turn the jog dial to select “A” and then turn the shuttle  
dial clockwise.  
(2) The second entry item “1” flashes.Turn the jog dial to  
select “B” and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
(3) The third entry item “1” flashes. Repeat the same  
procedure to set “AB123456”.  
<NETWORK SET>  
NETWORK CONTROL : ON(NETWORK)  
K
NETWORK STATUS  
IP ADDRESS  
SUBNET MASK  
GATEWAY  
PORT  
: ON  
: 192.168. 0.  
: 255.255.255.  
1
0
0
:
0. 0. 0.  
: 00080  
ID  
: PASSWORD (4-8)  
: AB123456  
ID1  
ID2  
: 2222----  
ID3  
: 3333----  
English  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
GENERAL SET  
4 Following this, turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “6. RS-485  
SET”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
5 Where necessary, use the same  
procedure to set the “ID2” and “ID3”  
passwords.  
The <RS-485 SET> screen is displayed with the cursor  
positioned on “DATA SPEED”.  
<RS-485 SET>  
<NETWORK SET>  
NETWORK CONTROL  
NETWORK STATUS  
IP ADDRESS  
SUBNET MASK  
GATEWAY  
PORT  
: ON(NETWORK)  
: ON  
DATA SPEED  
STATUS INFO  
ALARM INFO  
ADDRESS  
:
:
:
:
19200  
ON  
: 192.168. 0.  
: 255.255.255.  
1
0
0
ON  
001  
:
0. 0. 0.  
: 00080  
ID  
: PASSWORD (4-8)  
: AB123456  
ID1  
ID2  
: 2222----  
ID3  
: 3333----  
3 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and turn  
the jog dial to set “DATA SPEED”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
6 When setting has been completed,  
press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
The cursor moves to “STATUS INFO”.  
<RS-485 SET>  
EXIT/OSD  
DATA SPEED  
STATUS INFO  
ALARM INFO  
ADDRESS  
:
:
:
:
19200  
ON  
ON  
000  
Setting RS-485  
Use the following procedure to make RS-485 settings.  
Connect the digital video recorder's RS-485 (A, B) control  
terminals on the rear panel to the system controller or  
similar device.  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Setting  
DATA  
SPEED  
Description  
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200  
1 Press the [MENU] button and turn the  
jog dial to select “3. GENERAL SET”,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
4 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and turn  
the jog dial to set “STATUS INFO”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The <GENERAL SET> screen appears.  
MENU  
<GENERAL SET>  
1.DISPLAY SET  
2.BUZZER SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
The cursor moves to “ALARM INFO”.  
3.SECURITY LOCK SET  
4.HDD SET  
<RS-485 SET>  
5.NETWORK SET  
6.RS-485 SET  
DATA SPEED  
STATUS INFO  
ALARM INFO  
ADDRESS  
:
:
:
:
19200  
ON  
7.CAMERA CONTROL SET  
ON  
000  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Setting  
ON  
OFF  
Description  
Status information is transmitted.  
Status information is not transmitted.  
96  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
GENERAL SET  
5 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and turn  
the jog dial to set “ALARM INFO”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
Setting camera control  
The following procedure explains settings and operations  
of remote controllable cameras connected to the VIDEO IN  
terminals via coaxial cable.  
The cursor moves to “ADDRESS”.  
<RS-485 SET>  
1 Press the [MENU] button, turn the jog  
dial to select “3. GENERAL SET” and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
DATA SPEED  
STATUS INFO  
ALARM INFO  
ADDRESS  
:
:
:
:
19200  
ON  
ON  
000  
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.  
MENU  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Setting  
ON  
OFF  
Description  
Alarm information is transmitted.  
Alarm information is not transmitted.  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “7. CAMERA  
CONTROL SET” and then turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
6 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and set  
“ADDRESS” with the jog dial or numeric  
keys and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
The <CAMERA CONTROL SET> screen is displayed.  
<CAMERA CONTROL SET>  
CH PROTOCOL  
01 OFF  
02 OFF  
03 OFF  
04 OFF  
05 OFF  
06 OFF  
07 OFF  
08 OFF  
ADD.  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CH PROTOCOL  
09 OFF  
10 OFF  
11 OFF  
12 OFF  
13 OFF  
14 OFF  
15 OFF  
16 OFF  
ADD.  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
<RS-485 SET>  
DATA SPEED  
STATUS INFO  
ALARM INFO  
ADDRESS  
:
:
:
:
19200  
ON  
ON  
001  
3 Turn the jog dial to select a channel  
connected to a camera and then turn  
the shuttle dial clockwise.  
[Setting conditions]  
Addresses between “0” and “127” can be set for this unit.  
The “PROTOCOL” field flashes.  
7 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
<CAMERA CONTROL SET>  
CH PROTOCOL  
01 OFF  
02 OF  
03 OFF  
04 OFF  
05 OFF  
06 OFF  
07 OFF  
08 OFF  
ADD.  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CH PROTOCOL  
09 OFF  
10 OFF  
11 OFF  
12 OFF  
13 OFF  
14 OFF  
15 OFF  
16 OFF  
ADD.  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
EXIT/OSD  
English  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
GENERAL SET  
4 Turn the jog dial to select a protocol and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
z Camera control is only available for camera models  
supporting coaxial control or SANYO SSP control.  
Other companies’ cameras such as RS-485 and RS-  
422 are unsupported. For supported cameras, check  
the Sanyo homepage or ask at your local Sanyo dealer.  
Sanyo website URL:  
The “ADD.” column flashes.  
<CAMERA CONTROL SET>  
K
CH PROTOCOL  
01 SANYO COAX  
02 OFF  
ADD.  
---  
--  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CH PROTOCOL  
09 OFF  
10 OFF  
11 OFF  
12 OFF  
13 OFF  
14 OFF  
15 OFF  
16 OFF  
ADD.  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
03 OFF  
04 OFF  
http://www.sanyosecurity.com  
05 OFF  
06 OFF  
07 OFF  
08 OFF  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Setting  
Description  
OFF  
Camera control is disabled.  
Camera control is enabled using  
SANYO COAX  
SANYO (SSP) protocol coaxial super-  
imposition.  
Camera control is enabled using  
SANYO (SSP) protocol RS-485.  
SANYO RS485  
BBV COAX  
Camera control is enabled using BBV  
protocol.  
Camera control is enabled using  
PELCO protocol.  
PELCO COAX  
5 Set address (1 to 127) with the jog dial  
or numeric keys and turn the shuttle  
dial clockwise.  
Address can be set only for “SANYO COAX” or “SANYO  
RS485” protocols.  
<CAMERA CONTROL SET>  
CH PROTOCOL  
01 SANYO COAX  
02 OFF  
ADD.  
011  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CH PROTOCOL  
09 OFF  
10 OFF  
11 OFF  
12 OFF  
13 OFF  
14 OFF  
15 OFF  
16 OFF  
ADD.  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
03 OFF  
04 OFF  
05 OFF  
06 OFF  
07 OFF  
08 OFF  
6 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
EXIT/OSD  
98  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
GENERAL SET  
Button name in  
normal mode  
Operating dome cameras with the digital video  
recorder  
Button  
Operation  
Switches to iris adjust mode  
(indicator flashes).  
Press[ZOOM/INFO ] button  
to close iris and [ZOOM/  
INFO ] to open iris.  
[FUNC.] button  
[IRIS]  
button  
3
4
1
2
7 8  
11  
8
[STILL] button  
Press again to disable iris  
adjust mode (indicator  
remains lit).  
Switches to focus adjust  
mode (indicator flashes).  
Press [ZOOM/INFO  
]
button to focus on nearby  
objects and [ZOOM/  
HOLD] button INFO ] to focus on far-off  
objects.  
[FOCUS]  
button  
[SHUTTLE  
9
6
9 10  
12  
5
Press again to disable focus  
adjust mode (indicator  
remains lit).  
1 Press the [FUNC.] button.  
The FUNC. indicator lights up and camera control mode is  
Press [ZOOM/INFO ] to  
reduce screen.  
activated.  
[ZOOM/  
10 INFO]  
button  
Press [ZOOM/INFO ] to  
[ALARM]  
enlarge screen.  
button  
Use for operation when in  
FUNC.  
iris adjust mode and focus  
adjust mode.  
Pans faster the larger the  
arc, and slower the smaller  
the arc.  
2 The buttons on the digital video  
recorder operate the dome cameras as  
follows.  
11 PAN  
12 TILT  
Shuttle dial  
Jog dial  
Turn to the right to tilt up  
and to the left to tilt down.  
In camera control mode the indicator lights up for all the  
following.  
Finishing dome camera operation  
3 Press the [FUNC.] button  
The FUNC. indicator turns off and the unit returns to  
normal mode.  
Button name in  
normal mode  
Button  
Operation  
[MENU]  
button  
Displays camera internal  
menu screen.  
1
2
[MENU] button  
[ENTER]  
button  
[EXIT/OSD]  
button  
Selects in camera internal  
menu screen.  
Switches to preset access  
mode (indicator flashes).  
Press [CAMERA SELECT]  
[PRESET]  
button  
z In the following cases, when [FUNC.] button is pressed,  
camera control mode does not start.  
z When displaying menu, search menu  
z During playback (including when paused or  
displaying copy menu)  
3
[QUAD] button button to move the camera  
to preset position and  
disable preset access mode  
(indicator remains lit).  
Starts automatic panning.  
Perform another operation  
to stop automatic panning.  
[AUTO PAN] [MULTI]  
button  
4
5
z When in quad screen display, multi screen display (9  
screens/ 16 screens), or plus screen display  
z When zooming  
z When displaying automatic selection  
z When displaying monitor 2  
button  
Starts automatic camera  
selection.  
Perform another operation  
to stop automatic camera  
selection.  
[SEQUENC  
E]  
button  
[MON2]  
button  
z When PRESET, IRIS or FOCUS indicator is flashing  
(during operation) and another button is pressed, the  
operation is cancelled.  
z [REC/STOP][TIMER] buttons perform the same  
operation as in normal mode.  
Starts TOUR.  
[PLUS] button Perform another operation  
to stop TOUR.  
[TOUR]  
button  
6
7
[AF]  
button  
[PLAY/STOP]  
Use one-push auto-focus.  
button  
z In the following cases, camera control mode is  
automatically disabled.  
z When no operation is performed for two minutes  
z When the alarm activates  
English  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 SCREEN SET  
[EXIT/OSD] button  
Shuttle dial  
Main Menu  
[MENU] button  
<MAIN MENU>  
1.INITIAL SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
2.RECORD SET  
3.GENERAL SET  
4.SCREEN SET  
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME  
6.INITIALIZATION LOG  
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
Jog dial  
[QUAD] button  
2 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“NORMAL” flashes for “1. MULTI SCREEN”.  
Setting quad, multi 9 and 16 display  
Use the following procedure to change the display  
positions for cameras in quad, multi 9 and 16 screens.  
<SCREEN SET>  
1.MULTI SCREEN  
:
NORMAL  
->  
QUAD POSITION SET  
MULTI 9 POSITION SET  
->  
MULTI 16 POSITION SET  
->  
01  
03  
02  
04  
01  
03  
02  
06  
2.SEQUENCE SET  
SEQUENCE SET  
:
1S  
->  
01  
06  
02  
01  
04  
02  
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET ->  
3.MASK OFF  
MASK SET  
4.COLOR LEVEL SET  
:
->  
->  
3 Turn the jog dial to select “CHANGE”,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
z Each camera can only be displayed in one position on  
any screenP.  
The cursor moves to “QUAD POSITION SET”.  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Setting multi screen positions  
Setting  
Description  
Example: Displaying Camera No. 05 in quad position  
NORMAL The display sequence for cameras is not changed.  
01  
On the DSR-3709, select cameras No. 01 through No. 09.  
CHANGE The display sequence for cameras is changed.  
1 Press the [MENU] button and turn the  
jog dial to select to “4. SCREEN SET”,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
<SCREEN SET>  
1.MULTI SCREEN  
:
CHANGE  
->  
QUAD POSITION SET  
MULTI 9 POSITION SET  
->  
MULTI 16 POSITION SET  
->  
The <SCREEN SET> screen is displayed. The cursor  
moves to “1. MULTI SCREEN”.  
2.SEQUENCE SET  
SEQUENCE SET  
:
1S  
->  
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET ->  
3.MASK OFF  
MASK SET  
4.COLOR LEVEL SET  
MENU  
:
<SCREEN SET>  
->  
->  
1.MULTI SCREEN  
:
NORMAL  
->  
QUAD POSITION SET  
MULTI 9 POSITION SET  
->  
MULTI 16 POSITION SET  
->  
2.SEQUENCE SET  
SEQUENCE SET  
:
1S  
->  
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET ->  
3.MASK OFF  
MASK SET  
4.COLOR LEVEL SET  
:
->  
->  
100  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
SCREEN SET  
4 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
Checking modified screen positions  
The <QUAD POSITION SET> screen is displayed.  
Select one of the “CHECK THE SCREEN” at the bottom of  
the modification screen to confirm that the modified screen  
positions are as intended.  
<QUAD POSITION SET MENU>  
QUAD1  
QUAD2  
01  
03  
02  
05  
07  
06  
04  
08  
7 Turn the jog dial to select “CHECK THE  
SCREEN” and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
09  
11  
10  
12  
13  
15  
14  
16  
QUAD3  
QUAD4  
QUAD 1 pattern is displayed. Pressing the [QUAD] button  
changes the display in the order QUAD B J C J D.  
Turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise to return to the  
<QUAD POSITION SET> screen.  
CHECK THE SCREEN ->  
z When arranging display position for 9 screen display  
select “MULTI 9 POSITION SET” and for 16 screen  
display select “MULTI 16 POSITION.”  
<QUAD POSITION SET MENU>  
QUAD1  
QUAD2  
05  
03  
02  
05  
07  
06  
16 screen display can only be set on the DSR-3716.  
04  
08  
5 Turn the jog dial to select “01” of  
“QUAD1”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
09  
11  
10  
12  
13  
15  
14  
16  
QUAD3  
QUAD4  
CHECK THE SCREEN ->  
“01” of “QUAD1” flashes.  
<CHECK DDISPLAAY POSIITION>  
<QUAD POSITION SET MENU>  
QUAD1 QUAD2  
K
01  
03  
02  
05  
07  
06  
04  
08  
05  
02  
04  
09  
11  
10  
12  
13  
15  
14  
16  
QUAD3  
QUAD4  
CHECK THE SCREEN ->  
03  
8 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
6 Set “05” with the jog dial or numeric  
keys and turn the shuttle dial to the  
right.  
the normal screen.  
EXIT/OSD  
“01” of “QUAD1” changes to “05.”  
<QUAD POSITION SET MENU>  
QUAD1  
QUAD2  
05  
03  
02  
05  
07  
06  
04  
08  
09  
11  
10  
12  
13  
15  
14  
16  
QUAD3  
QUAD4  
CHECK THE SCREEN ->  
English  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
SCREEN SET  
4 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
Setting the period and monitors for  
automatic screen selection  
the normal screen.  
Use the following procedure to scroll through video from all  
cameras using a specified period.  
EXIT/OSD  
A switching time for automatic selection can only be set for  
full screen and quad display.  
z Switching interval is set for all cameras from main  
monitor and monitor 2.  
Setting the automatic selection period  
Example:  
z The interval can be set between 1 and 30 seconds.  
z Select “INDIV.” in step 2 to set automatic selection time  
for each display screen, monitor, or camera.  
(1) Select “INDIV.” in step 2 and turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise  
The cursor moves to “SEQUENCE SET”.  
(2) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise  
Automatic switching of a full screen on the monitor  
every 5 seconds.  
1 Press the [MENU] button and turn the  
jog dial to select “4. SCREEN SET”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The <SEQUENCE SET> screen is displayed.  
The <SCREEN SET> screen is displayed. The cursor  
moves to “1. MULTI SCREEN”.  
<SEQUENCE SET>  
MAIN MON.  
MON.2  
FULL  
QUAD  
FULL  
:
:
:
1S  
1S  
1S  
MENU  
INDIVIDUAL INTERVAL (SEC)  
01: 1S  
05: 1S  
09: 1S  
13: 1S  
02: 1S  
06: 1S  
10: 1S  
14: 1S  
03: 1S  
07: 1S  
11: 1S  
15: 1S  
04: 1S  
08: 1S  
12: 1S  
16: 1S  
2 Turn the jog dial to move the cursor to  
“2. SEQUENCE SET”, and then turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
(3) Set items with the jog dial and turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise to select  
Select “INDIV.” to set automatic selection time for  
each camera.  
“1S” flashes.  
<SCREEN SET>  
1.MULTI SCREEN  
:
CHANGE  
->  
Setting the main monitor and monitor 2  
QUAD POSITION SET  
MULTI 9 POSITION SET  
->  
Example:  
MULTI 16 POSITION SET  
->  
Specifying a monitor to display each camera’s video at  
the set period (as indicated by TIME PERIOD A and  
TIME PERIOD B).  
2.SEQUENCE SET  
SEQUENCE SET  
:
1S  
->  
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET ->  
3.MASK OFF  
MASK SET  
4.COLOR LEVEL SET  
:
->  
->  
1 Make timer settings for “TIME PERIOD  
A” and “TIME PERIOD B” from <TIME  
PERIOD SET>. (JP.57)  
3 Turn the jog dial to set change the  
period to “5S”, and then turn the shuttle  
dial clockwise.  
Specify “TIME PERIOD A” and “TIME PERIOD B”.  
Automatic selection is set to a period of 5 seconds.  
2 Press the [MENU] button and turn the  
jog dial to select “4. SCREEN SET”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
<SCREEN SET>  
1.MULTI SCREEN  
:
CHANGE  
->  
QUAD POSITION SET  
MULTI 9 POSITION SET  
->  
The <SCREEN SET> screen is displayed. The cursor  
moves to “1. MULTI SCREEN”.  
MULTI 16 POSITION SET  
->  
2.SEQUENCE SET  
SEQUENCE SET  
:
5S  
->  
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET ->  
3.MASK OFF  
MASK SET  
4.COLOR LEVEL SET  
MENU  
:
->  
->  
102  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
SCREEN SET  
3 Turn the jog dial to move the cursor to  
“MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET”, and then  
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
6 Turn the jog dial clockwise or counter-  
clockwise to move the cursor to the  
main-monitor or monitor 2 channel to be  
changed.  
The <MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET> screen is displayed.  
On the DSR-3709, select cameras No. 1 through No. 9.  
<SCREEN SET>  
1.MULTI SCREEN  
:
CHANGE  
->  
QUAD POSITION SET  
7 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
MULTI 9 POSITION SET  
->  
MULTI 16 POSITION SET  
->  
“ON” flashes.  
2.SEQUENCE SET  
SEQUENCE SET  
:
1S  
->  
<MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET>  
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (06:00-11:30)  
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET ->  
3.MASK OFF  
MASK SET  
4.COLOR LEVEL SET  
:
->  
->  
CH  
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
MAIN MON.  
MON.2  
CH  
<MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET>  
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (06:00-11:30)  
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08  
MAIN MON.  
MON.2  
CH  
MAIN MON.  
MON.2  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
8
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” or “OFF”,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
CH  
MAIN MON.  
MON.2  
After confirming this setting, the cursor moves one position  
to the right.  
4 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“T-1” starts to flash for “TIME PERIOD”.  
<MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET>  
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (06:00-11:30)  
CH  
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08  
ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
<MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET>  
MAIN MON.  
MON.2  
CH  
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (06:00-11:30)  
MAIN MON.  
MON.2  
CH  
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
MAIN MON.  
MON.2  
CH  
MAIN MON.  
MON.2  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Settings  
ON  
OFF  
Description  
Camera images displayed.  
Camera images not displayed.  
5 Turn the jog dial to select T-1, T-2, T-3,  
or T-4 for the time period, and then turn  
the shuttle dial clockwise.  
9 Use the same procedure to set the  
remaining channels.  
After setting the period, the cursor moves to “ON” for the  
“MAIN MON.”.  
10Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
<MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET>  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (06:00-11:30)  
the normal screen.  
CH  
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
EXIT/OSD  
MAIN MON.  
MON.2  
CH  
MAIN MON.  
MON.2  
z When setting a number of time periods together, use  
the jog dial to move the cursor to the next period after  
completing step 9, and repeat the process from step 4.  
z The time period for “T-1” through “T-4” changes to that  
of “TIME PERIOD A” or “TIME PERIOD B” on P.57.  
English  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
SCREEN SET  
Setting masks  
4 Turn the jog dial to select “ON”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
Use the following procedure to set video from a specific  
camera (including playback video) to be masked by a gray  
pattern when it is not to be shown on a monitor screen.  
The cursor moves to “MASK SET”.  
<SCREEN SET>  
1.MULTI SCREEN  
:
CHANGE  
->  
QUAD POSITION SET  
MULTI 9 POSITION SET  
->  
MULTI 16 POSITION SET  
->  
2.SEQUENCE SET  
SEQUENCE SET  
:
1S  
->  
01  
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET ->  
3.MASK ON  
MASK SET  
4.COLOR LEVEL SET  
:
->  
->  
04  
5 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The <MASK SET> screen is displayed.  
Example:  
Preventing the display of unneeded camera video at  
the set period (as indicated by TIME PERIOD A and  
TIME PERIOD B).  
<MASK SET>  
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (06:00-11:30)  
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08  
CH  
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
MON.2  
NETWORK  
CH  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
1 Make timer settings for “TIME PERIOD  
A” and “TIME PERIOD B” from <TIME  
PERIOD SET>. (JP.57)  
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
MON.2  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
NETWORK  
Specify “TIME PERIOD A” and “TIME PERIOD B”.  
6 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“T-1” starts to flash for “TIME PERIOD”.  
<MASK SET>  
2 Press the [MENU] button, turn the jog  
dial to select “4. SCREEN SET”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The <SCREEN SET> screen is displayed. The cursor  
moves to “1. MULTI SCREEN”.  
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (06:00-11:30)  
01 02 004 05 06 07 08  
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
CH  
MON.2  
NETWORK  
CH  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
MENU  
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
MON.2  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
NETWORK  
3 Turn the jog dial to move the cursor to  
“MASK”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
7 Turn the jog dial to select T-1, T-2, T-3,  
or T-4 for the time period, and then turn  
the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“OFF” flashes.  
After setting the period, the cursor moves to channel 01 for  
the “MAIN MON.”.  
<SCREEN SET>  
1.MULTI SCREEN  
:
CHANGE  
->  
<MASK SET>  
QUAD POSITION SET  
MULTI 9 POSITION SET  
->  
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (06:00-11:30)  
MULTI 16 POSITION SET  
->  
CH  
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08  
2.SEQUENCE SET  
SEQUENCE SET  
:
1S  
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
->  
MON.2  
NETWORK  
CH  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET ->  
3.MASK OFF  
MASK SET  
4.COLOR LEVEL SET  
:
->  
->  
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
MON.2  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
NETWORK  
z Each camera can be set individually for the main  
monitor, the monitor 2, and network video.  
104  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
SCREEN SET  
8 Turn the jog dial clockwise or counter-  
clockwise to move the cursor to  
channel to be changed.  
z When setting a number of time periods together, use  
the jog dial to move the cursor to the next period after  
completing step 10, and repeat the process step 6  
through 10.  
On the DSR-3709, select cameras No. 1 through No. 9.  
z The time period for “T-1” through “T-4” changes to that  
of “TIME PERIOD A” or “TIME PERIOD B” on P.57.  
z Network mask settings are valid only for the user  
connecting to the network with ID1. Users connecting  
using ID2 and ID3 will be able to display all channels.  
9 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“OFF” flashes.  
<MASK SET>  
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (06:00-11:30)  
CH  
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08  
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
Setting the color level  
MON.2  
NETWORK  
CH  
OFF OF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
Use the following procedure to adjust the color of video  
displayed on monitors.  
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
MON.2  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
NETWORK  
1 Press the [MENU] button, turn the jog  
dial to select “4. SCREEN SET”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Setting  
OFF  
ON  
Description  
Masking is not performed.  
Masking is performed.  
The <SCREEN SET> screen is displayed. The cursor  
moves to “1. MULTI SCREEN”.  
MENU  
z Masked channels will not display playback video. To  
view playback video, turn masking “OFF” in step 3.  
10Turn the jog dial to select “ON” or  
“OFF”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “4. COLOR  
LEVEL SET”, and then turn the shuttle  
dial clockwise.  
After confirming this setting, the cursor moves one position  
to the right.  
The <COLOR LEVEL SET> screen is displayed.  
<COLOR LEVEL SET>  
<MASK SET>  
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (06:00-11:30)  
CH  
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08  
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
MON.2  
NETWORK  
CH  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
MON.2  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
CH01  
COLOR LEVEL : 5  
NETWORK  
11Use the same procedure to set the  
remaining channels.  
12Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
EXIT/OSD  
English  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
SCREEN SET  
3 Press the [CAMERA SELECT] button for  
the camera whose color level is to be  
set, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
“5” flashes.  
<COLOR LEVEL SET>  
CH02  
COLOR LEVEL : 5  
4 Turn the jog dial to select a “COLOR  
LEVEL” (1 through 10), and then turn  
the shuttle dial clockwise.  
[Settings] (indicates default setting)  
Setting  
Description  
1 to10  
(5)  
Manual adjustment to one of 10 levels.  
Light (1) to Dark (10)  
5 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
EXIT/OSD  
106  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 POWER LOSS/USED TIME  
[EXIT/OSD] button  
Shuttle dial  
Main Menu  
[MENU] button  
<MAIN MENU>  
1.INITIAL SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
2.RECORD SET  
3.GENERAL SET  
4.SCREEN SET  
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME  
6.INITIALIZATION LOG  
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
Jog dial  
Use the following procedure to check the date and time of  
power losses, the amount of hard disk operation time, and  
the amount of power-on time.  
2 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The display returns to the normal screen.  
EXIT/OSD  
1 Press the [MENU] button and turn the  
select “5. POWER LOSS/USED TIME”,  
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The <POWER LOSS/USED TIME> screen is displayed.  
MENU  
<POWER LOSS/USED TIME>  
POWER  
#011  
LOSS  
RECOVER  
01-14 19:15 01-15 09:55  
01-13 21:13 01-14 09:21  
01-03 18:48 01-05 08:56  
01-01 09:49 01-03 10:32  
DISK1 USE : 00096H  
(1)  
(2)  
USED TIME  
DISK2 USE : -----H  
(3)  
(4)  
POWER  
: 00096H  
F/W: M 0.30-00 / S 0.20-04 / C 0.09-00  
Check the date and time of power losses and the amount  
of hard disk operation time.  
(1) LOSS/RECOVER  
Display information in sequence for the four most  
recent power losses (i.e., the date and time of loss  
and recovery).  
The number on the left is the number of power losses  
(Example: #011). For all numbers above 999, the  
number “999” is displayed.  
(2) DISK1 USE  
Displays the total amount of running time for disk 1.  
(3) DISK2 USE  
Displays the total amount of running time for disk 2.  
When only one hard disk is installed, “------” is  
displayed.  
(4) POWER  
Displays the amount of power-on time for the digital  
video recorder.  
English  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 INITIALIZATION LOG  
[EXIT/OSD] button  
Shuttle dial  
Main menu  
[MENU] button  
<MAIN MENU>  
1.INITIAL SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
2.RECORD SET  
3.GENERAL SET  
4.SCREEN SET  
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME  
6.INITIALIZATION LOG  
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
Jog dial  
Use the following procedure to display the eight most  
recent entries in the initialization and re-recording log for  
the hard disk.  
2 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.  
The display returns to the normal screen.  
EXIT/OSD  
1 Press the [MENU] button and turn the  
jog dial to select “6. INITIALIZATION  
LOG”, and then turn the shuttle dial  
clockwise.  
The <INITIALIZATION LOG> screen is displayed.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
MENU  
<INITIALIZATION LOG>  
DATE  
TIME  
AREA  
10-26  
10-26  
10-26  
10-26  
10-26  
10-26  
10-26  
-----  
18:25  
23:18  
23:18  
23:18  
23:18  
23:16  
23:15  
--:--  
ALL AREAS (INITIALIZED)  
ALL AREAS (INITIALIZED)  
ARCHIVE  
(AREA RESET)  
ALARM REC (AREA RESET)  
NORMAL REC (AREA RESET)  
ALL AREAS (INITIALIZED)  
ALL AREAS (INITIALIZED)  
------  
(------)  
(1) DATE/TIME  
Displays the date and time of the operation.  
(2) AREA  
Displays the area on which the operation was  
performed.  
(3) Operation class  
Displays the operation performed as either of the  
following:  
zINITIALIZED  
zAREA RESET  
z “INITIALIZED” is displayed when recording areas have  
been changed.  
108  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 COPY MENU SETTINGS  
[MENU] button  
Shuttle dial  
Main Menu  
<MAIN MENU>  
1.INITIAL SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
2.RECORD SET  
3.GENERAL SET  
4.SCREEN SET  
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME  
6.INITIALIZATION LOG  
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
Jog dial  
Use the following procedure to save menu settings on a  
CompactFlash card or to load settings from a  
CompactFlash card back into the digital video recorder.  
These functions make it easy to use the same settings on  
a number of different hard disk digital recorders.  
Saving menu settings on a  
CompactFlash card  
Insert a CompactFlash card into the CompactFlash card slot.  
1 Turn the jog dial to select “SAVE  
MENUS TO CF”, and then turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
1 Press the [MENU] button and turn the  
jog dial to select “7. COPY MENU  
SETTINGS”, and then turn the shuttle  
dial clockwise.  
<WARNING> screen is displayed.  
<WARNING>  
The <COPY MENU SETTINGS> screen is displayed.  
SAVE MENUS TO CF!!  
<COPY MENU SETTINGS>  
DVR TYPE VER. SA16-03  
CONTINUE?  
NO  
SAVE MENUS TO CF  
->  
->  
(1)  
(2)  
LOAD MENUS FROM CF  
COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS: NO  
*IF YOU CHOOSE $YES$ OF THE ABOVE MENU,  
HARD DISK WILL BE INITIALIZED !  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “YES”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
(1) SAVE MENUS TO CF  
This saves the menu settings to a CompactFlash card.  
(1) The saving process begins.  
(2) LOAD MENUS FROM CF  
This loads menu settings into the digital video recorder  
from a CompactFlash card.  
SAVING TO CF!!  
(2) When this has been completed, “SAVING  
FINISHED!!” is displayed. A file named  
“MENUCOPY.TXT” is created in the CompactFlash  
directory.  
<COPY MENU SETTINGS>  
SAVING FINISHED!!  
SAVE MENUS TO CF  
->  
->  
LOAD MENUS FROM CF  
COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS: NO  
*IF YOU CHOOSE $YES$ OF THE ABOVE MENU,  
HARD DISK WILL BE INITIALIZED !  
English  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
COPY MENU SETTINGS  
When copying recording area settings  
Loading settings from a  
CompactFlash card  
Use the following procedure to copy recording area settings.  
Use the following procedure to load menu settings saved  
on a CompactFlash card back into the digital video  
recorder.  
1 Turn the jog dial to select “COPY  
RECORDING AREA SETTINGS”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
“NO” flashes.  
z When loading a menu setting file into the recorder, you  
will be able to specify whether recording area settings  
are to be copied. Normally, “COPY RECORDING  
AREA SETTINGS” should be set to “NO”. If set to  
“YES”, hard disk initialization will be carried out as part  
of the loading process, and all recorded data will be  
lost.  
z Different menu setting file formats cannot be loaded.  
Check that the version that is displayed in “DVR TYPE  
VER.” matches before loading.  
<COPY MENU SETTINGS>  
DVR TYPE VER. SA16-03  
SAVE MENUS TO CF  
->  
->  
LOAD MENUS FROM CF  
COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS: NO  
*IF YOU CHOOSE $YES$ OF THE ABOVE MENU,  
HARD DISK WILL BE INITIALIZED !  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “YES”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
1 Turn the jog dial to select “LOAD  
MENUS FROM CF”, and then turn the  
shuttle dial clockwise.  
The cursor returns to “SAVE MENUS TO CF”.  
<COPY MENU SETTINGS>  
<WARNING> screen is displayed.  
DVR TYPE VER. SA16-03  
SAVE MENUS TO CF  
->  
->  
<WARNING>  
LOAD MENUS FROM CF  
LOAD MENUS FROM CF!!  
COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS: NO  
*IF YOU CHOOSE $YES$ OF THE ABOVE MENU,  
HARD DISK WILL BE INITIALIZED !  
CONTINUE?  
NO  
3 Turn the jog dial to select “LOAD  
MENUS FROM CF”.  
4 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
<WARNING> screen is displayed.  
2 Turn the jog dial to select “YES”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
(1) The loading process begins.  
<WARNING>  
LOAD MENUS FROM CF!!  
LOADING FROM CF!  
CONTINUE?  
NO  
5 Turn the jog dial to select “YES”, and  
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.  
The loading process starts.  
When this has been completed, “SYSTEM INITIALIZING”  
is displayed and the display returns to the normal screen.  
(2) When this has been completed, “SYSTEM  
INITIALIZING” is displayed and the display returns to  
the normal screen.  
z
Normally, “COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS” should  
be set to “NO”. If set to “YES”, hard disk initialization will be  
carried out, and all recorded data will be lost.  
110  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS  
RS-485 specifications  
Data format  
Mode  
Asynchronous  
8 bits  
Character length  
Data transmission speed 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, 19,200 bps  
Parity check  
Stop bit  
None  
1 bit  
Communication protocol  
A proprietary protocol (SANYO protocol) is used. Use of a  
special controller for operation is recommended. To obtain  
this controller, contact a Sanyo service center.  
English  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS  
SANYO protocol command table  
The table below shows the commands supported by the digital video recorder.  
Left digit  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Right digit  
0
TIMER  
ON/OFF  
0
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SHIFT  
I
SHIFT  
J
SHIFT  
K
SHIFT  
L
MENU  
SET+  
/RP UP  
5
6
5
6
SET-  
/RP DOWN  
7
8
7
8
SECURITY  
LOCK ON  
9
9
REV PLAY/  
SEARCH (DVR)  
SECURITY  
LOCK OFF  
A
ACK  
NAK  
PLAY  
B
C
GROUP SET  
GROUP  
CHECK  
D
GROUP  
CLEAR  
E
F
STOP  
B
STILL  
C
Left digit  
8
9
A
D
E
F
Right digit  
0
CLOCK  
ADJUST  
FULL1  
FULL2  
FULL3  
MENU  
RESET  
1
2
MULTI  
(MPX)  
3
4
QUAD (MPX)  
PLUS1 (MPX)  
FULL4  
FULL5  
ZOOM  
(MPX/DVR)  
5
6
7
FULL6  
FULL7  
FULL8  
SEQUENCE  
(MPX)  
STATUS  
SENSE  
MONITOR2  
(MPX)  
8
9
FULL9  
CLOCK  
DOWNLOAD  
FULL10  
CAMERA  
CONTROL  
(MPX)  
REC/DUB  
REQUEST  
A
ALARM RESET  
FULL11  
REC  
B
C
FULL12  
FULL13  
FF/ALARM F  
CHANNEL  
COPY  
REW/ALARM R  
AUX ON  
RS-485  
SEND START  
D
E
F
FULL14  
FULL15  
FULL16  
AUX OFF  
STATUS  
LOG2  
RS-485  
RCV CMF.  
EXIT/OSD  
STATUS  
LOG1  
REC STOP  
112  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 SPECIFICATIONS  
Specifications  
Digital video recorder with multiplexer function  
Product name  
Product number  
DSR-3716 (16 channel), DSR-3709 (9 channel)  
Capability for mounting 80, 160, 250, or 300 GB hard disks (sold separately)  
NTSC signal standard  
Hard disk capacity  
Television system  
Compression  
Image: M-JPEG, Audio: WAVE  
Picture resolution  
Recording type  
720 x 240 (fields)  
Field recording  
Picture quality  
5 levels [Basic, Normal, Enhanced, Fine, Super Fine]  
27 levels (60 to 0.033 FPS)  
Recording rate  
Recording areas  
Normal recording area, Alarm recording area, Archive area  
x2 digital zoom using the [ZOOM] button  
Magnification  
Search modes  
Time/date search, Alarm search, Alarm thumbnail search, Archive area search, Motion detection search  
Month, Day, Year (last two digits), Hours, Minutes, Seconds  
2 position; upper and lower (display may also be turned off)  
Each channel; up to 10 alphanumeric characters and symbols (display may also be turned off)  
Approximately 30 days (for 48 hours of electrification)  
VBS/VS 1.0 V (p-p), 75 , BNC (DSR-3716: x16, DSR-3709: x9)  
Through output of each video input, BNC (DSR-3716: x16, DSR-3709: x9)  
VBS 1.0 V (p-p), 75 , BNC (x1)  
Date/clock settings  
Date and time positions  
Camera title display  
Memory backup  
Video input terminal  
Video output terminal  
Main monitor output terminal  
Monitor 2 output terminal  
Audio input terminal  
Audio output terminal  
Microphone input terminal  
VBS/VS 1.0 V (p-p), 75 , BNC (x1)  
-8 dBs, 27 k, unbalanced RCA (x1)  
-8 dBs, 600 , unbalanced RCA (x1)  
-60 dBs, 10 k, unbalanced 3.5 mm monaural pin jack (x1)  
1.0 Vp-p, 75 , unbalanced RCA x 1  
Video output terminal  
Audio output terminal  
Front AV  
output  
-8 dBs, 600 , unbalanced RCA x 1  
CompactFlash card slot  
CompactFlash Type 2 (front panel) (x1)  
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, RJ-45 (x1)  
Compatible protocol: UDP, TCP/IP, HTTP server  
LAN terminal  
RS-485 terminal  
USB terminal  
RJ-11 (x2) (with a termination switch)  
USB 1.1 series A terminal (x2) (front x1, rear x1)  
Alarm input terminals  
No-volt contacts (with a pulse width of 100 ms or more) (DSR-3716: x16, DSR-3709: x9)  
Sensor alarm output terminals Open collector, Low level active (Max. 25 mA) (DSR-3716: x16, DSR-3709: x9)  
Remote control input terminal Two-wire voltage control (x2)  
Clock adjust input terminal  
No-volt contacts (with a pulse width of 100 ms or more) (x1)  
Clock adjust output terminal Normal 5 V DC, Low level active (x1)  
Alarm output terminal  
Active Low, Open collector Max. 500 mA (x1)  
No-volt contacts (with a pulse width of 100 ms or more) (x1)  
Normal 5 V DC, Low level active (x1)  
Terminals  
Alarm reset input terminal  
Warning output terminal  
Normal recording area disk  
full warning output terminal  
Normal 5 V DC, Low level active (x1)  
Normal 5 V DC, Low level active (x1)  
Alarm recording area disk full  
warning output terminal  
Series connection input  
Series connection output  
Normal 5 V DC, Low level active (x1)  
Normal 5 V DC, Low level active (x1)  
External timer input terminal No-volt contacts (with a pulse width of 1 second or more) (x1)  
Non rec output terminal  
Normal 5 V DC, Low level active (x1)  
Power supply voltage  
Current consumption  
Allowable operating temperature  
Allowable operating humidity  
Dimensions  
120 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz  
600 mA  
5 °C to 40 °C  
10 % to 80 %  
420 (W) x 86 (H) x 365 (D) mm (Not including protruding areas or rubber pads)  
6.3 kg with a HDD, 6.9 kg with 2 HDDs  
Power cord (x1), Core clamp (x2), Power cord tie (x1)  
Weight  
Accessory  
Note that product appearance and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.  
English  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
SPECIFICATIONS  
Dimensions  
Units: mm  
DSR-3716  
420  
365  
DSR-3709  
420  
365  
UL disclaimer statement  
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (“UL”) has not tested the performance or reliability of this hardware, operating software or other  
aspects of this product.  
UL has only tested for fire, shock or casualties as outlined in UL’s Standard(s) for Safety.  
UL Certification does not cover the performance or reliability of the security hardware and security operating software.  
UL MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES OR CERTIFICATIONS WHATSOEVER REGARDING THE  
PERFORMANCE OR RELIABILITY OF ANY SECURITY RELATED FUNCTIONS OF THIS PRODUCT.  
114  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
SPECIFICATIONS  
Table of recording rate and times  
This products’s recording time can be changed by modifying the recording rate and the recording picture quality.  
The following table provides reference values for picture quality and recording rate in a situation where video is recorded to the  
normal recording area of this product’s hard disk.  
z The time setting for the normal recording area and the alarm recording area is determined by multiplying the following  
recording time by the percent display value for the normal recording area and the alarm recording area as specified using  
the menu’s recording area settings.  
z The recording time may change for different recording picture qualities.  
Example: Recording to a 80 GB hard disk (100%-usage)  
Recording time  
ENHANCED  
30kB  
Recording rate  
FPS (field/sec)  
BASIC  
15kB  
NORMAL  
22kB  
FINE  
42kB  
8H  
16H  
24H  
32H  
48H  
64H  
80H  
SUPER FINE  
50kB  
6H  
60.00  
30.00  
20.00  
15.00  
10.00  
7.50  
6.00  
5.00  
4.29  
3.75  
3.33  
3.00  
2.73  
2.31  
2.00  
1.67  
1.43  
1.25  
1.11  
1.00  
0.50  
0.33  
0.25  
0.20  
0.10  
0.05  
0.03  
20H  
41H  
62H  
82H  
14H  
29H  
44H  
58H  
11H  
22H  
33H  
44H  
66H  
88H  
13H  
20H  
27H  
40H  
54H  
67H  
81H  
94H  
108H  
122H  
135H  
149H  
176H  
203H  
244H  
284H  
325H  
366H  
406H  
813H  
1220H  
1627H  
2034H  
4069H  
8138H  
12207H  
124H  
165H  
207H  
248H  
290H  
331H  
373H  
414H  
456H  
539H  
622H  
746H  
871H  
995H  
1120H  
1244H  
2489H  
3734H  
4978H  
6223H  
12447H  
24894H  
37341H  
88H  
117H  
146H  
176H  
205H  
235H  
264H  
293H  
323H  
382H  
440H  
529H  
617H  
705H  
793H  
881H  
1763H  
2645H  
3526H  
4408H  
8816H  
17633H  
26450H  
110H  
132H  
154H  
176H  
198H  
220H  
242H  
286H  
330H  
396H  
462H  
529H  
595H  
661H  
1322H  
1983H  
2645H  
3306H  
6612H  
13225H  
19837H  
96H  
112H  
128H  
144H  
160H  
176H  
208H  
240H  
288H  
336H  
384H  
432H  
480H  
961H  
1442H  
1923H  
2404H  
4809H  
9618H  
14427H  
Example: Recording to a 160 GB hard disk (100%-usage)  
Recording time  
ENHANCED  
30kB  
Recording rate  
FPS (field/sec)  
BASIC  
15kB  
NORMAL  
22kB  
FINE  
42kB  
16H  
32H  
48H  
SUPER FINE  
50kB  
60.00  
30.00  
20.00  
15.00  
10.00  
7.50  
6.00  
5.00  
4.29  
3.75  
3.33  
3.00  
2.73  
2.31  
2.00  
1.67  
1.43  
1.25  
1.11  
1.00  
0.50  
0.33  
0.25  
0.20  
0.10  
0.05  
0.03  
41H  
83H  
124H  
166H  
249H  
333H  
416H  
499H  
583H  
666H  
749H  
833H  
29H  
59H  
88H  
118H  
177H  
236H  
295H  
354H  
413H  
472H  
531H  
590H  
649H  
767H  
885H  
1062H  
1239H  
1416H  
1593H  
1770H  
3541H  
5311H  
7082H  
8852H  
17705H  
35411H  
53116H  
22H  
44H  
66H  
88H  
132H  
177H  
221H  
265H  
309H  
354H  
398H  
442H  
486H  
575H  
663H  
796H  
13H  
27H  
40H  
54H  
64H  
96H  
81H  
128H  
160H  
193H  
225H  
257H  
289H  
321H  
354H  
418H  
482H  
579H  
676H  
772H  
869H  
965H  
1931H  
2897H  
3863H  
4828H  
9657H  
19315H  
28972H  
108H  
136H  
163H  
190H  
217H  
245H  
272H  
299H  
354H  
408H  
490H  
572H  
653H  
735H  
817H  
1634H  
2451H  
3268H  
4085H  
8171H  
16343H  
24515H  
916H  
1083H  
1249H  
1499H  
1749H  
1999H  
2249H  
2499H  
4999H  
7498H  
9998H  
12498H  
24996H  
49992H  
74988H  
929H  
1062H  
1195H  
1327H  
2655H  
3983H  
5311H  
6639H  
13279H  
26558H  
39837H  
Area in which sound recording is possible (when recording sound, the recording time is shorter than that shown above.)  
English  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
SPECIFICATIONS  
Example: Recording to a 300 GB hard disk (100%-usage)  
Recording time  
ENHANCED  
30kB  
Recording rate  
FPS (field/sec)  
BASIC  
15kB  
NORMAL  
22kB  
FINE  
42kB  
SUPER FINE  
50kB  
60.00  
30.00  
20.00  
15.00  
10.00  
7.50  
6.00  
5.00  
4.29  
3.75  
3.33  
3.00  
2.73  
2.31  
2.00  
1.67  
1.43  
1.25  
1.11  
1.00  
0.50  
0.33  
0.25  
0.20  
0.10  
0.05  
0.03  
78H  
156H  
234H  
313H  
469H  
626H  
782H  
939H  
1095H  
1252H  
1408H  
1565H  
1721H  
2034H  
2347H  
2817H  
3286H  
3756H  
4226H  
4695H  
9391H  
14087H  
18782H  
23478H  
46956H  
93913H  
140870H  
55H  
110H  
166H  
221H  
332H  
443H  
554H  
665H  
41H  
83H  
124H  
166H  
249H  
332H  
415H  
498H  
582H  
665H  
748H  
831H  
30H  
60H  
90H  
25H  
51H  
76H  
102H  
153H  
204H  
255H  
307H  
358H  
409H  
460H  
511H  
562H  
665H  
767H  
921H  
1074H  
1228H  
1381H  
1535H  
3070H  
4605H  
6140H  
7675H  
15351H  
30702H  
46053H  
120H  
181H  
241H  
302H  
362H  
423H  
483H  
544H  
604H  
665H  
786H  
907H  
1088H  
1269H  
1451H  
1632H  
1814H  
3628H  
5442H  
7256H  
9071H  
18142H  
36284H  
54427H  
776H  
886H  
997H  
1108H  
1219H  
1441H  
1663H  
1995H  
2328H  
2660H  
2993H  
3326H  
6652H  
9978H  
13304H  
16630H  
33261H  
66522H  
99783H  
914H  
1080H  
1247H  
1496H  
1746H  
1995H  
2245H  
2494H  
4989H  
7483H  
9978H  
12472H  
24945H  
49891H  
74837H  
Area in which sound recording is possible (when recording sound, the recording time is shorter than that shown above.)  
116  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
SPECIFICATIONS  
Table of recording rate settings  
Normal recording rate  
Alarm recording rate  
Pre-alarm recording rate  
Display  
sequence  
Display  
sequence  
Display  
sequence  
Recording rate  
FPS (field/sec)  
Recording rate  
FPS (field/sec)  
Recording rate  
FPS (field/sec)  
1
60.00 (Note1, 2)  
30.00  
20.00  
15.00  
10.00  
7.50  
1
30.00  
20.00  
15.00  
10.00  
7.50  
6.00  
5.00  
4.29  
3.75  
3.33  
3.00  
2.73  
2.31  
2.00  
1.67  
1.43  
1.25  
1.11  
1.00  
0.50  
0.33  
0.25  
0.20  
0.10  
0.05  
0.03  
1
2
30.00  
20.00  
15.00  
10.00  
7.50  
6.00  
5.00  
4.29  
3.75  
3.33  
3.00  
2.73  
2.31  
2.00  
1.67  
1.43  
1.25  
1.11  
1.00  
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
6.00  
7
7
8
5.00  
8
8
9
4.29  
9
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
3.75  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
3.33  
3.00  
2.73  
2.31  
2.00  
1.67  
1.43  
1.25  
1.11  
1.00  
0.50  
0.33  
0.25  
0.20  
0.10  
0.05  
0.03  
(Note 1) 30 FPS maximum when pre-alarm recording is set to “ON”.  
(Note 2) 30 FPS maximum when recording only one camera; 60 FPS maximum when recording two or more cameras.  
Program recording rate  
Display  
sequence  
Recording rate  
FPS (field/sec)  
This table indicates recording rate settings for  
individual cameras.  
1 (Note1)  
30  
When making settings for multiple cameras, ensure  
that the total recording rate is within 60 FPS.  
2
3
15  
7.5  
4
3.75  
Settings are adjusted automatically to ensure that the  
total recording rate is within 60 FPS; accordingly, if a  
setting value cannot be raised, the value for a different  
camera must first be lowered.  
5
1.875  
1.000  
0.500  
0.330  
0.250  
0.200  
0.100  
0.050  
0.033  
6
7
8
9
* FPS stands for fields per second, the number of  
images that are recorded in a single second.  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
(Note 1) A selection cannot be made when pre-alarm recording has been set to “ON”.  
English  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
SPECIFICATIONS  
Table of pre-alarm recording times  
This table indicates recording times for pre-alarm recording, and it should be used when this type of recording is being carried  
out.  
Recording time (Display of time on menu screens s: seconds m: minutes)  
Recording rate  
3s  
5s  
10s  
20s  
40s  
60s  
120s  
(2m)  
180s  
(3m)  
240s  
(4m)  
300s  
500s  
900s  
FPS (field/sec)  
(3s)  
(5s)  
(10s)  
(20s)  
(40s)  
(1m)  
(5m) (10m) (15m)  
30.00  
20.00  
15.00  
10.00  
7.50  
6.00  
5.00  
4.29  
3.75  
3.33  
3.00  
2.73  
2.31  
2.00  
1.67  
1.43  
1.25  
1.11  
1.00  
Default setting, Recording rate: 15 FPS, Recording time: 1 min.  
When setting alarm durations using a menu, settings will be restricted to those available for the selected recording rate.  
Similarly, when setting recording rates, the setting range will be restricted to that available for the selected duration. For  
example, if the alarm duration is set to 3 seconds, only 30 FPS will be selectable for the recording rate.  
When setting fast recording rates, it may be necessary to first of all change the alarm duration setting.  
118  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
SPECIFICATIONS  
Terminal board specifications  
Input/output terminals  
Signal level  
Input/output circuit  
5V  
Open  
ground  
input  
100k  
1k  
10k  
Alarm input  
IC  
74HC597  
Terminal  
[No-volt contacts]  
0V  
100ms or more  
Open  
Sensor alarm output  
[Open collector/1k, Low  
level active (max: 25mA)]  
1k  
IC  
BU209  
Terminal  
0V  
Detect motion Stop alarm  
sensor  
recording  
+5V  
4.7k  
1k  
CTL2,3 Remote control input  
[Two-wire voltage control]  
Remote  
control  
terminal  
(JP.14)  
Sub micro  
processor  
5V  
Open  
ground  
input  
100k  
10k  
CTL4 Clock adjust input  
[No-volt contacts]  
1k  
IC  
74HC597  
Terminal  
0V  
100ms or more  
5V  
5V  
0V  
CTL5 Clock adjust output  
[Normal 5V/5.7k, Low level  
active]  
4.7k  
1k  
IC  
BU209  
Terminal  
Terminal  
Approx. 1 second  
Open  
5V  
CTL6 Alarm output  
[Open collector/1k, Low  
level active (max: 500mA)]  
4.7k  
1k  
0V  
IC  
BU209  
Start alarm Finish alarm  
recording  
recording  
5V  
Open  
ground  
input  
100k  
10k  
CTL7 Alarm reset input  
[No-volt contacts]  
1k  
IC  
74HC597  
Terminal  
0V  
100ms or more  
English  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
SPECIFICATIONS  
Input/output terminals  
Signal level  
Input/output circuit  
5V  
5V  
0V  
4.7k  
1k  
CTL8 Warning output  
[DC5V/5.7k, Active Low]  
IC  
BU209  
Terminal  
Terminal  
Terminal  
Warning conditions established  
(HDD error, FAN error detected)  
5V  
5V  
0V  
4.7k  
1k  
CTL9 Normal recording area  
disk full warning output  
[DC5V/5.7k, Active Low]  
IC  
BU209  
Warning conditions established  
(no space in normal recording area)  
5V  
5V  
0V  
4.7k  
1k  
CTL10 Alarm recording area  
disk full warning output  
[DC5V/5.7k, Active Low]  
IC  
BU209  
Warning conditions established  
(no space in alarm recording area)  
5V  
100k  
5V  
CTL11 Series connection  
input  
[DC5V/5.7k, Active Low]  
1k  
10k  
IC  
74HC597  
Terminal  
0V  
300ms or more  
5V  
5V  
CTL12 Series connection  
output  
4.7k  
1k  
[DC5V/5.7k, Active Low]  
IC  
BU209  
Terminal  
0V  
3 seconds or more  
5V  
Open  
ground  
input  
100k  
10k  
1k  
CTL13 External timer input  
[No-volt contacts]  
IC  
74HC597  
Terminal  
0V  
100ms or more  
5V  
5V  
4.7k  
CTL14 Non rec output  
1k  
[DC5V/5.7k, Active Low]  
IC  
BU209  
Terminal  
0V  
Stop recording  
120  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 MENU SETTING SEQUENCE  
<MAIN MENU>  
1.INITIAL SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
INITIAL SET (P.51)  
RECORD SET (P.60)  
2.RECORD SET  
3.GENERAL SET  
<INITIAL SET>  
<RECORD SET>  
1.LAUNGUAGE/CLOCK SET  
2.CAMERA DETECT  
3.TITLE SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
1.NORMAL REC EASY SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
4.SCREEN SET  
2.RECORDING AREA SET  
3.RECORDING CONDITIONS SET  
4.NORMAL REC MODE SET  
5.PROGRAM REC SET  
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME  
6.INITIALIZATION LOG  
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS  
4.HOLIDAY SET  
5.TIME PERIOD SET  
6.TIMER SET  
7.ALARM REC MODE SET  
8.ALARM OPERATION SET  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
RECORDING DURATION BASE (P.61)  
LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET (P.51)  
NORMAL REC EASY SET (P.60)  
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>  
K
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/IDIOMA>  
ENGLISH  
K
<NORMAL REC EASY SET>  
RECORDING DURATION  
TIMER RECORDING(DLY)  
START --:--  
:
:
-- DAYS  
OFF  
<CLOCK SET>  
RECORDING DURATION BASE  
REC RATE BASE  
->  
->  
STOP --:--  
01-01-2004 THU 00:00:00  
<DAYLIGHT SAVING>  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
:
:
ENHANCED  
OFF  
MODE  
:
USE  
MONTH  
04  
WEEK  
TIME  
NUMBER OF CAMERAS  
REC RATE  
:
:
2
ON  
OFF  
1ST-SUN  
LST-SUN  
02:00  
02:00  
CAUTION !  
CONNECT CAMERA AND SET TIME  
BEFORE SETUP  
10  
------FPS/CAM  
<EXT.CLOCK SET>  
ADJUST. TIME 01:00  
REC RATE BASE (P.63)  
CAMERA DETECT (P.54)  
RECORDING AREA SET (P.64)  
<RECORDING AREA SET>  
<REC RATE BASE>  
: ----- FPS/CAM  
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : OFF  
K
<WARNING>  
TOTAL CAPACITY  
:
:
82GB  
80 %  
REC RATE  
NORMAL RECORDING AREA  
CAMERA DETECT  
AREA FULL RESET  
ALARM RECORDING AREA  
AREA FULL RESET  
ARCHIVE AREA  
->  
START --:--  
STOP --:--  
:
:
19 %  
1 %  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
: ENHANCED  
: OFF  
->  
->  
CONTINUE?  
NO  
AREA FULL RESET  
NUMBER OF CAMERAS  
RECORDING DURATION  
: 2  
CAUTION : WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,  
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !  
: ---- DAYS  
RECORDING CONDITIONS SET (P.67)  
TITLE SET (P.55)  
<TITLE SET>  
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>  
NORMAL RECORDING AREA  
OVERWRITE  
: ON  
CAMERA NO.01 ________01  
ALARM RECORDING AREA  
OVERWRITE  
: ON  
REMAINING DISK WARNING  
SERIES REC  
: **  
: OFF  
: OFF  
AUTO DELETE  
HOLIDAY SET (P.56)  
NORMAL REC MODE SET (P.71)  
<HOLIDAY SET>  
K
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>  
1. -----  
11. -----  
12. -----  
13. -----  
14. -----  
15. -----  
16. -----  
17. -----  
18. -----  
19. -----  
20. -----  
PICTURE QUALITY  
AUDIO RECORDING  
: ENHANCED  
: OFF  
Numbers can be entered with the  
[CAMERA SELECT] buttons when  
“K” is displayed at the top-right of  
the menu screen.  
2. -----  
3. -----  
4. -----  
5. -----  
6. -----  
7. -----  
8. -----  
9. -----  
10. -----  
REC RATE  
:
15FPS ( 35H)  
: OFF  
REC PROGRAM GROUP  
TIME PERIOD SET (P.57)  
PROGRAM REC SET (P.73)  
<TIMER PERIOD SET>  
T-1 T-2  
K
<PROGRAM REC SET>  
TIME PERIOD  
T-3  
T-4  
PROGRAM : P-1  
TIME PERIOD A 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00  
TIME PERIOD B 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00  
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE(FPS)  
SELECT TIME PERIOD  
01: 0.5  
05: 0.5  
09: 0.5  
13: 0.5  
02: 0.5  
06: 0.5  
10: 0.5  
14: 0.5  
03: 0.5  
07: 0.5  
11: 0.5  
15: 0.5  
04: 0.5  
08: 0.5  
12: 0.5  
16: 0.5  
SEQUENCE  
MASK  
TIME PERIOD A  
TIME PERIOD A  
TIME PERIOD A  
MOTION SENSOR  
NORMAL REC : 65H  
TIMER SET (P.74)  
MOTION SENSOR SET (P.81)  
ALARM REC MODE SET (P.77)  
<TIMER SET>  
K
<ALARM REC MODE SET>  
WEEK  
SUN  
MON  
TUE  
WED  
THU  
FRI  
SAT  
DLY  
EXT  
START  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
*****  
STOP  
PROGRAM  
OFF  
FPS  
SET  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ALARM RECORDING  
: OFF  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
--:--  
*****  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
15 FPS  
PICTURE QUALITY  
: ENHANCED  
: OFF  
OFF  
AUDIO RECORDING  
OFF  
ALARM INTERLEAVE  
REC RATE: 15FPS,  
PRE-ALARM RECORDING  
REC RATE: **** FPS,  
: ONLY  
OFF  
DURATION: 20SEC  
: ***  
DURATION: ****  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
=> (01731 ALARMS CAN BE RECORDED)  
OFF  
ALARM TRIGGER  
MOTION SENSOR  
: ALARM  
->  
CH01 T-1  
LEVEL : OFF  
MODE : A  
OFF  
ALARM OPERATION SET (P.84)  
<ALARM OPERATION SET>  
ALARM RETRIGGER  
: OFF  
MAIN MON. DISPLAY  
ALARM PRIORITY  
MON.2 DISPLAY  
: NC  
: LAST  
: OFF  
English  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
MENU SETTING SEQUENCE  
SCREEN SET (P.100)  
GENERAL SET (P.86)  
POWER LOSS/USED TIME (P.107)  
INITIALIZATION LOG (P.108)  
COPY MENU SETTINGS (P.109)  
<GENERAL SET>  
<SCREEN SET>  
1.MULTI SCREEN  
QUAD POSITION SET  
MULTI 9 POSITION SET  
MULTI 16 POSITION SET  
<POWER LOSS/USED TIME>  
<INITIALIZATION LOG>  
<COPY MENU SETTINGS>  
1.DISPLAY SET  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
->  
:
NORMAL  
->  
POWER  
#011  
LOSS  
RECOVER  
DATE  
TIME  
AREA  
2.BUZZER SET  
01-14 19:15 15-01 09:55  
01-13 21:13 14-01 09:21  
01-03 18:48 05-01 08:56  
01-01 09:49 03-01 10:32  
DISK1 USE : 00096H  
10-26  
10-26  
10-26  
10-26  
10-26  
10-26  
10-26  
-----  
18:25  
23:18  
23:18  
23:18  
23:18  
23:16  
23:15  
--:--  
ALL AREAS (INITIALIZED)  
ALL AREAS (INITIALIZED)  
DVR TYPE VER. SA16-03  
3.SECURITY LOCK SET  
4.HDD SET  
->  
->  
ARCHIVE  
(AREA RESET)  
SAVE MENUS TO CF  
->  
->  
5.NETWORK SET  
6.RS-485 SET  
2.SEQUENCE SET  
SEQUENCE SET  
:
1S  
ALARM REC (AREA RESET)  
NORMAL REC (AREA RESET)  
ALL AREAS (INITIALIZED)  
ALL AREAS (INITIALIZED)  
->  
USED TIME  
LOAD MENUS FROM CF  
7.CAMERA CONTROL SET  
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET ->  
3.MASK OFF  
MASK SET  
4.COLOR LEVEL SET  
DISK2 USE : -----H  
COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS: NO  
:
POWER  
: 00096H  
->  
->  
------  
(------)  
*IF YOU CHOOSE $YES$ OF THE ABOVE MENU,  
HARD DISK WILL BE INITIALIZED !  
MOVE:JOG  
SELECT:SHUTTLE  
F/W: M 0.30-00 / S 0.20-04 / C 0.09-00  
QUAD POSITION SET MENU (P.100)  
DISPLAY SET (P.86)  
<DISPLAY SET>  
<QUAD POSITION SET MENU>  
QUAD1 QUAD2  
K
DATE  
: ON  
: ON  
: ON  
: ON  
: ON  
: ON  
: ON  
TIME  
01  
03  
02  
05  
07  
06  
QUALITY  
AUDIO  
04  
08  
ALARM COUNT  
ALARM TYPE  
TITLE  
09  
11  
10  
12  
13  
15  
14  
16  
QUAD3  
QUAD4  
VIDEO LOSS  
: ON  
CHECK THE SCREEN ->  
BUZZER SET (P.88)  
MULTI 9 POSITION SET MENU (P.100)  
<MULTI 9 POSITION SET MENU>  
K
<BUZZER SET>  
ALARM  
: OFF  
: ON  
DISK FULL  
DISK ERROR  
LOCK WARNING  
KEY IN  
01  
04  
07  
02  
05  
08  
03  
06  
09  
: ON  
: ON  
: OFF  
: OFF  
NON REC  
CHECK THE SCREEN ->  
SECURITY LOCK SET (P.89)  
MULTI 16 POSITION SET MENU (P.100)  
<MULTI 16 POSITION SET MENU>  
K
<SECURITY LOCK SET>  
PASSWORD(4-8) USE  
K
LEVEL  
01  
05  
09  
13  
02  
06  
10  
14  
03  
07  
11  
15  
04  
08  
12  
16  
ADMIN  
--------  
--------  
OFF  
OFF  
USER  
REC CONTROL  
CAMERA CONTROL  
: ADMIN  
: ADMIN  
CHECK THE SCREEN ->  
HDD SET (P.92)  
SEQUENCE SET (P.102)  
<HDD SET>  
<SEQUENCE SET>  
DISK1  
:
:
82GB  
---GB  
->  
MAIN MON.  
FULL  
QUAD  
FULL  
:
:
:
1S  
1S  
1S  
DISK2  
DISK INITIALIZE  
MON.2  
CAUTION : ALL RECORDING WILL BE ERASED!  
INDIVIDUAL INTERVAL (SEC)  
01: 1S  
05: 1S  
09: 1S  
13: 1S  
02: 1S  
06: 1S  
10: 1S  
14: 1S  
03: 1S  
07: 1S  
11: 1S  
15: 1S  
04: 1S  
08: 1S  
12: 1S  
16: 1S  
MIRRORING  
:
:
OFF  
***  
PLAYBACK DRIVE  
CAUTION : RECORDING SPEED WILL BE  
LIMITED BY MIRRORING!  
NETWORK SET (P.93)  
MAIN/MON2 MONITOR SET (P.102)  
<NETWORK SET>  
NETWORK CONTROL : OFF  
K
<MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET>  
NETWORK STATUS  
IP ADDRESS  
SUBNET MASK  
GATEWAY  
PORT  
: ON  
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (06:00-11:30)  
: 192.168. 0.  
: 255.255.255.  
1
0
0
CH  
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON  
:
0. 0. 0.  
MAIN MON.  
MON.2  
CH  
: 00080  
ID  
: PASSWORD (4-8)  
: 1111----  
ID1  
MAIN MON.  
MON.2  
ID2  
: 2222----  
ID3  
: 3333----  
RS-485 SET (P.96)  
MASK SET (P.104)  
<MASK SET>  
<RS-485 SET>  
K
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (06:00-11:30)  
DATA SPEED  
STATUS INFO  
ALARM INFO  
ADDRESS  
:
:
:
:
19200  
ON  
CH  
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08  
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
ON  
MON.2  
NETWORK  
CH  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
000  
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
MON.2  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF  
NETWORK  
CAMERA CONTROL SET (P.97)  
COLOR LEVEL SET (P.105)  
<CAMERA CONTROL SET>  
<COLOR LEVEL SET>  
CH PROTOCOL  
01 OFF  
02 OFF  
03 OFF  
04 OFF  
05 OFF  
06 OFF  
07 OFF  
08 OFF  
ADD.  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CH PROTOCOL  
09 OFF  
10 OFF  
11 OFF  
12 OFF  
13 OFF  
14 OFF  
15 OFF  
16 OFF  
ADD.  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
CH01  
COLOR LEVEL : 5  
122  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
A
K
Administrator ................................................................. 89  
ALARM FULL indicator .................................................... 7  
ALARM indicator ............................................................. 7  
ALARM OPERATION SET ............................................ 84  
ALARM PRIORITY ........................................................ 85  
Alarm recording ............................................................. 24  
Alarm recording area ..................................................... 18  
ALARM RETRIGGER .................................................... 84  
Alarm search ................................................................. 31  
Alarm thumbnail search ................................................. 32  
ALARM TRIGGER ......................................................... 81  
ALARM TYPE ................................................................ 87  
Archive area .................................................................. 18  
Archive area search ...................................................... 34  
AREA FULL RESET ...................................................... 66  
AUDIO RECORDING .................................................... 62  
AUTO DELETE ............................................................. 71  
Automatic screen selection ........................................... 21  
KEY IN ...........................................................................88  
L
LEVEL ............................................................................83  
LOCK indicator ................................................................7  
LOCK WARNING ...........................................................88  
M
MAIN MENU ..................................................................47  
Main monitor ................................................................102  
MENU RESET button ....................................................48  
MIRRORING ..................................................................93  
MODE ............................................................................83  
Monitor 2 (MON2) ................................................. 21, 102  
Motion detection search .................................................34  
MOTION SENSOR ........................................................81  
Multi screen ...................................................................20  
B
N
BUZZER SET ................................................................ 88  
Network settings ............................................................93  
NORMAL REC EASY SET ............................................60  
Normal recording ...........................................................23  
Normal recording area ...................................................18  
Normal recording easy setup .........................................60  
C
CAMERA CONTROL SET ...................................... 13, 97  
CAMERA DETECT ........................................................ 54  
CAMERA SELECT .......................................................... 7  
Canceling alarms ........................................................... 85  
CD-R/RW ...................................................................... 45  
Changing recording areas ............................................. 65  
CLOCK SET .................................................................. 17  
CompactFlash card ....................................................... 41  
P
PASSWORD setting ......................................................89  
PICTURE QUALITY .......................................................62  
PLAYBACK DRIVE ........................................................93  
Plus screen ....................................................................20  
PORT .............................................................................95  
POWER LOSS/USED TIME ........................................107  
Pre-alarm recording .......................................................25  
PRECAUTION .................................................................1  
D
DISK ERROR ................................................................ 88  
DURATION .................................................................... 79  
Q
E
Quad screen ..................................................................19  
Quick print ......................................................................43  
Expanding the hard disk capacity .................................. 93  
External clock setting .................................................... 53  
R
F
REC CONTROL .............................................................91  
REC RATE BASE ..........................................................63  
RECORD SET ...............................................................60  
Recording areas ............................................................64  
Recording days ..............................................................61  
RECORDING DURATION BASE ...................................61  
Recording pattern ..........................................................79  
Recording rate ...............................................................63  
REMAINING DISK WARNING .......................................68  
RS-485 ........................................................... 11, 96, 111  
FULL indicator ................................................................. 7  
Full screen ..................................................................... 19  
G
GATEWAY .................................................................... 95  
GENERAL SET ............................................................. 86  
H
Hard disk settings .......................................................... 92  
S
I
Saving user settings ....................................................109  
SCREEN SET ..............................................................100  
SECURITY LOCK SET ..................................................89  
SEQUENCE SET .........................................................102  
INITIAL SET .................................................................. 51  
INITIALIZATION LOG ................................................. 108  
Initializing the hard disk ................................................. 92  
IP ADDRESS ................................................................. 95  
English  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
Series recording ............................................................ 69  
Setting alarm recording ................................................. 77  
Setting camera titles ...................................................... 55  
Setting data display ....................................................... 86  
Setting display for video loss ......................................... 87  
Setting holidays ............................................................. 56  
Setting masks .............................................................. 104  
Setting normal recording ............................................... 71  
Setting program recording ............................................. 73  
Setting quad positions ................................................. 100  
Setting recording conditions .......................................... 67  
Setting the color level .................................................. 105  
Setting time periods ....................................................... 57  
SHUTTLE HOLD ........................................................... 27  
SUBNET MASK ............................................................. 95  
T
Time/date search ........................................................... 32  
Timer recording ............................................................. 23  
Timer settings ................................................................ 74  
U
USER ............................................................................ 90  
Z
ZOOM ............................................................................ 27  
124  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

PYLE Audio Speaker PLD12WD User Guide
QSC Audio Car Speaker AD S82 User Guide
RCA TV DVD Combo RCRVD2022 User Guide
ResMed Sleep Apnea Machine 61500 User Guide
Ricoh Printer SP C811DN Series User Guide
Rosen Entertainment Systems IP Phone VoiceCom2000 User Guide
Samson Stereo Amplifier PG2200 User Guide
Samsung Printer SL C410W User Guide
Sanyo Universal Remote GXDB User Guide
Sega Video Game Controller Pega gc110 User Guide